Home

User`s manual ACB530

1. X1 1 10kohm J1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1112 JAN External frequency reference 1 0 10 V ea 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt TD 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA lt D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 110 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable io 1 The nd Hat is 20 ROTA A Default operation Hari qe cd erence a Vett 21lRO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note z COME 23 RO2A A Default operation Aopen connected 124 R02B_ H Running gt 22 connected to 24 DB TDI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable o Jo Reference through Al1 26 RO3A Default operation 1 0 CONST SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 O 1 cowsr SPEED 2 1203 Fault 2 25 connected to 26 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1
2. supervised parameter goes above Pe ENS NA N the highest limit LO 3202 making 7 that limit the active limit That limit gt remains active until the supervised Mors 4 parameter goes below the lowest Energized l ii limit HI 3203 making that limit active 9 3 Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY Case B A OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY Energie d oa OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 0 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially Los Hi the relay is de energized It is Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with energized whenever the supervised para supervision limits parameter goes above the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit e Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY i0 G20 ns OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 aes E Em UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially is the relay is energized It is cen 4 de energized whenever the Bee ea supervised parameter o d goes below the active limit o eam A Ju E AUS EDEN RE LUE Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 Range Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 Range Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Parameter Descriptions 7 45 Parameter Number Selection Value SUPERVISION SUPERV 2 PARAM 3204 Continued Group 100 101
3. Drive RS485 Terminal block X1 se g a Note 1 y 5 5 v k S o oo cc b z z cc U 1 oO E A n ea lt lt un 28 29 30 EX 32 Notes 1 Set switch J2 to OFF ON position would make the Sea Note 3 network active pull up amp pull down BIAS resistors Ground KR KA E are on board the drive 2 Tie shield wires together at the drive Do NOT terminate at SCR 3 Terminate the shield ONLY at the Ground terminal in the controller 4 Terminate the AGND wire at the Reference terminal in the controller See Note 4 Reference Common Controller E 2 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 E 5 Communication Set Up EFB E 5 1 Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS NOTE If you cannot see the desired selection on the keypad your drive does not have the protocol software in the application memory Contact Baldor for assistance E 5 2 Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below Note that the station ID may require adjustment 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter Contains the indentification and program revision
4. Defines the source for the reset of peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 Default 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range 100 178 NOT SELECTED No signal parameter logged for amplitude distribution amplitude logger 2 Logs parameter 0101 0178 Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 e Any parameter number in Group OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED Default Depends on the signal selected with par 6404 Range Defines the base value from which the percentage distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL Default Range Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL Parameter Descriptions 7 65 Parameter Number Group Selection Value LOAD PEAK TIME 1 6407 ANALYZER Continued PEAK TIME 2 6408 CURRENT AT PEAK 6409 UDC AT PEAK 6410 FREQ AT PEAK 6411 TIME OF RESET 1 6412 TIME OF RESET 2 6413 AL1RANGE0TO10 6414 AL1RANGE10TO20 6415 AL1RANGE20TO30 6416 AL1RANGESOTOA4O 6417 AL1RANGE40TO50 6418 AL1RANGE5OTOGO 6419 AL1RANGE60TO70 6420 7 66 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days Date of the peak value detection Format Date if the real time clock is operating d
5. DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e De activating the digital input activates the sleep function e Activating the digital input restores PID control DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 INV above Defines the control for the PID sleep function Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL e See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback t P4024 e p t gt P4024 X Ha P403 XA 4 t 8 4 NL eile P4026 Setpoint Setpoint Parameter Descriptions 7 59 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number PROCESS PID PID SLEEP DELAY 4024 SET 1 Continuea WAKE UP DEV 4025 WAKE UP DELAY 4026 ENERGY ENERGY PRICE 4502 SAVING CO2 CONV FACTOR 4507 PUMP POWER 4508 ENERGY RESET 4509 7 60 Parameter Descriptions Selection Value Parameter Name and Description Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequ
6. user s manual Lift the drive only by the metal chassis 1 2 Introduction MN796 ACB530 1 6 Inspection Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damanged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type Designation Label 1 7 Type Designation Label The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ACS550 01 08A8 4 lt Type designation ul 3 380 480 V AA D I2N I2hd 6 8 6 9 A PN Phd 4 0 3 0 kW sero 1065 Serial number vt 3 380 480 V IP21 UL type 1 NEMA 1 n 8 8 A A ABB Oy MADE IN FINLAND n 48 63 Hz C QWs 7 ya 3 0 U1 V M n we 2hd 8 8 6 9 A e MP LLL EY Motor PNIPhd 4 0 3 0 kW Seo 1 7 04 Serial number ACS550 01 08A8 4 Type uma For more w ormahon see User s Manual IPH 48 43 He TPRA ATI 192114 TYPE 208 240 Vac 206 240 Vac MTR OL INCL SEE MANUAL M25 4624 M i u C e LISTED 45Y1 124534 Po EN Ong Fermaare VI 1A sm 2090601940 al Serial number A U1 046A 2 4 Type designation 1 7 1 Serial Number Explanation The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Countr
7. COMM VALUE 1 0135 COMM VAULE 2 0136 PROCESS VAR 1 0137 PROCESS VAR 2 0138 PROCESS VAR 3 0139 RUN TIME 0140 MWH COUNTER 0141 REVOLUTION CNTR 0142 MN796 ACB530 Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 The PID 1 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 The PID 1 controller feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters Read Only Range 0 65535 Free data location that can be written from serial link e Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 Read Only Range 32768 to 32767 Free data location that can be written from serial link Read Only Range 32768 to 32767 Free data location that can be written from serial link Read Only Range Process variable 1 e Defined by parameters in Group PANEL DISPLAY Read Only Range Process variable 2 e Defined by parameters in Group PANEL DISPLAY Read Only Range Process variable 3 e Defined by parameters in Group PANEL DISPLAY Read Only Range 0 00 499 99 kh The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cann
8. Default 1096 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Default 30096 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point Default 25 Hz Range 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Default 1596 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Default 30096 Range 0 600 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point Default 43 Hz Range 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Default 2596 Range 0 600 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 Default 30096 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point Default 50 Hz Range 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Parameter Descriptions 7 53 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value USER LOAD LOAD TORQ LOW 4 3714 Default 3096 CURVE Range 0 600 Continued Define
9. Default Firmware version Range 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the drive s firmware Default Type dependent Range 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the loading package Default Range yy ww Contains the test date yy ww Default Type dependent Range Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating Default Type dependent Range 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PANEL SIGNAL1 PARAM 3401 Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ DISPLAY Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 Group Parameter Name and Description 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed Displays parameter 0101 0178 If parameter does not exist the display shows 101 178 na Selects the first parameter by number P 3404 P 3405 displayed on the control panel e Definitions in this group define display LOC t i Y content when the control pane
10. 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL 1 T Set for appropriate drive 20 CONST SP7 response 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss E 7 Information from the drive EFB E 7 1 Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol Obtaining information from the drive does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of data Modbus Protocol Reference 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit O DIS NOTE With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Drive Parameter E 7 2 Actual Value Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent For actual values scale the integer using the parameter s resolution The following table shows an oe Feedback Integer Feedback Integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 10 0 1 10 e 0 1 1 When parameters are in percent the complete parameter description specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 The following table shows an example Integer Value Read Parameter Hala at Integer Value Parameter resolution Value of 100 Ref from Drive Resolution defines 100 100 Scaled Value 10 0 196 1500 rpm 10 e 0 196 e 1500 RPM 100 15 RP
11. If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local Baldor distributor A 5 Efficiency Approximately 9896 at nominal power level A 4 Technical Specifications MN796 ACB530 Chapter B Parameter Tables B 1 Parameter Settings by Group Table B 1 Parameter Settings by Group Parameter Number Selection Value START UP LANGUAGE 9901 Default O English DATA Range 0 2 OPERATING MODE 9902 Default 1 Range 1 6 CONTROL TYPE 9904 Default 2 Range 1 2 Default U1 yyyy 2 230V U1 yyyy 4 460 V U1 yyyy 6 575 V Range U1 yyyy 2 115 345 V U1 yyyy 4 230 690 V U1 yyyy 6 288 862 V MOTOR RATED AMPS Default 1 0 9906 xii Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting MOTOR RATED VOLTS 9905 Range 0 2 2 0 where is drive current MOTOR RATED FREQ Default U1 60 0 Hz 9907 Range 10 0 500 0 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz MOTOR RATED SPEED Default Dependent Upon Size 9908 Range 50 30 000 RPM MOTOR RATED HP 9
12. par 1108 2016 2018 torque 2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 0 2 0 Final reference limited by 4012 4013 PID set 1 reference 10000 par 1108 or 4112 4113 PID set 2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM Al1 or COMM Al1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMMM Al1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 Al input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 noe REF1 COMM Al1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient Al input signal 100 0 5 par MOI z REF2 COMM Al1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fiekibus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 17 pz Alt input signal 100 0 5 par HO REF2 COMM AH COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient E 20 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 Reference handling Use START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldb
13. 02TA6 A Installing the Drive 3 3 3 4 Dimensions and Weights 3 4 3 4 1 Dimensions and Weights The dimensions for the ACB530 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of the frame size first find the Type designation on the drive labels see sections Type designation on and Drive labels Then locate that type designation in the rating tables see Appendix A Technical Specs to determine the frame size Figure 3 1 Mounting Dimensions ena See detail A 18 8 88 fi See detailB T e d Detail A Detail B Table 3 6 IP21 UL type 1 and IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size 160 238 is ja 38s sa e sm zz em 2 a ss o2 55 o2 ss 025 05 025 65 025 90 955 e oo oa wo o4 130 os wo os 140 oss 180 on e ss 02 55 o2 so os 80 os 8s os 85 03 as 02 ss o2 65 025 es 025 6s 025 90 os 1 Center to center dimension Figure 3 2 Outside Dimensions Drives with IP21 UL type 1 Enclosures Types ACB530 x1 246A 4 and ACB530 01 290A 4 frame size R6 W H2 H3 X0031 Installing the Drive MN796 ACB530 IP21 UL type 1 Dimensions for each Frame Size ARTO A EN uuu eee RO OR DR D e c BEIM ow us 49 ws 49 203 80
14. 4 D P the time required to increase the ae aan output by the error value CP BOON 2 e Error value is constant and 100 e Gain 1 TEN Integration time of 1 second A Error l denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second e See 4001 for adjustment procedure Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 10 0 s B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 Defines the PID controller s derivation time Error e You can add the derivative 100 p of the error to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output e The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER rn 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds Default 1 0 s Range 0 0 10 0s A Process error value 0 gt t PID output t D part of controller output 1 Gain _ P 4001 Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter e Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds Default 0 NO Range 0 1 NO Normal a decrease i
15. 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles 0 992 1010 RESERVED Not used 1011 1016 PAR USER LOAD Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met e 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 e 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 e 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 e 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 e 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 e 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 9 8 Embedded Fieldbus Faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR 0028 9 8 1 No Master Device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do Check that the network master is connected and properly configured Check the cable connection 9 8 2 Same Device Address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address 9 8 3 Incorrect Wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5
16. 8 9 1 Settings 8 10 Programmable relay OUTPUT s oae sete aei odo e aoe ca e CR tae a RR t didi is P dan 8 10 1 Settings 8 10 2 IDIAGNOSUCS a feces pepe Rr heed RI ano Rte UN o OS AA eae Y Gee cn 8 11 Actual signals 8 11 1 Settings 8 1 1 2 Diagnostics 2 is ea tx pow xa perle a handed air etw ed a ee SU EIE 812 Motor identification seem decenas aes dad E a a aa Er URS 8 12 1 Settings 8 13 Power loss ride tlirough io cog aa e ware EY a Rede Raed ale we on 8 13 Power loss ride thro glh 2 br a pro bare d grid fra eae 8 13 1 Settings 8 14 DC magnetizing 3 xs Saee A a m d ak ox nde di Dn Rt e EUR oem d alle doa 8 14 1 Settings 8 15 DC hold 8 15 1 Settings 8 16 Flux braking 8 16 1 Settings 8 17 Fl x optimization zi bike btae dead Rye eer e eeu Rea Pes xa NY Edna eR EXE e 8 17 1 Settings 8 8 8 10 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 12 8 12 8 13 8 13 8 13 8 13 8 13 8 14 8 14 8 14 8 14 8 14 8 14 8 14 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 18 8 18 MN796 ACB530 8 18 Acceleration and deceleration faMpS ooooocoooo le 8 18 1 Settings 8 19 Critical speeds 8 19 1 Settings 8 20 Constant speeds 8 20 1 Settings 8 21 Speed controller tuning issu re meh ER nis S RR RR A dae 8 21 1 Settings 8 21 2 Diagnostics 8 22 V F control 8 22 1 Settings 8 23 Programmable pro 8 23 1 Al lt Min 8 23 2 Settings
17. Al2 INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference signal MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PROCESS PID INTERNAL SETPNT 4011 Default 40 0 SET 1 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 Group Parameter Name and Description Continued Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 SETPOINT MIN 4012 Default 0 096 Range 500 0 to 500 0 Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source e See parameter 4010 SETPOINT MAX 4013 Default 100 0 Range 500 0 to 500 0 Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source e See parameter 4010 FBK SEL 4014 Default 1 ACT1 Range 1 13 ACT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 Sqrt ACT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback sign
18. Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 20 3096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 30 4096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 40 5096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 50 6096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 60 7096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 70 8096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 80 9096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 over 90 distribution Parameter Descriptions 7 67 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value OPTIONS COMM PROT SEL 9802 Default O NOT SEL Range 0 1 4 Group Parameter Name and Description NOT SEL No communication protocol selected STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal e See also Group EFB PROTOCOL EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive e See also Group EXT COMM MODULE Selec
19. Default 100 0 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 0 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 Default 1 Al1 Range 0 2 8 17 19 KEYPAD Keypad Al1 Analog Input Al1 Al2 Analog Input Al2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF 2 COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 COMM AI2 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 DI3U 4D RNC Digital Input DI3 Reference increase Digital Input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM DI3U 4D NC Digital Input DI3 Reference increase Digital Input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 AM AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 60
20. R 4 20 3e Notes ess 19 29 re 1 Not available in ACB530 U1 series 2 Not available in ACB530 01 series MN796 ACB530 General Information and Ratings 2 3 Table 2 3 Ratings 500 600V Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols Treo gt Normaluse Heaw dutyuse A illa te see below Three phase supply voltage 500 600V Note 1 are 27 15s 2 24 A 15 R asas eo 85 75 e 4 1 5 a amas u 75 10 90 55 75 rR 00246 62 s 52 37 50 R4 e 7 s s 4 9 me e es 75 7 ss 7 me 125 amp 6 125 90 125 99 75 10 re Me wa 10 10 as 9 ws re 1 Not available in ACB530 01 series 2 1 1 1 Definitions Typical ratings Normal use 1096 overload capability continuous rms current 1096 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 5096 overload capability Dona continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes P typical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors 2N P hd 2 1 1 2 Sizing The current ratings are the same re
21. REM _UPAR EDIT OPEN VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 9902 OPERATING MODE V F CONTROL is recommended ABB 2 WIRE for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected 1 to the drive is variable CANCEL I SAVE when the nominal motor current is less than 2096 of the nominal CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected 9904 CONTROL TYPE OPEN VECTOR 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE O Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on Asynchronous motor nameplate example the motor nameplate d 3 x ABB Motors C For example if the motor 3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 nominal speed is 1470 rpm IEC 200 M L 55 on the nameplate setting SF rE the value of parameter V Hz kW r min A cos 9IA IN tE s 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 690Y 50 30 1475 32 5 0 83 to 1500 rpm results in the 400D 50 30 11475 56 088 wrong operation of the drive 660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0 83 380D 50 30 1470 59 0 83 415D 50 30 1475 54 0 83 440D 60 35 1770 59 0 83 Cat no 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 03 Jim 6210 C3 180 kg O IEC 34 1 9 8 2 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Continued e motor rated voltage parameter 9905
22. Table A 1 Ambient Environmental Requirements Storage and transportation in the ERE AAA protective package Altitude e 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if PN and I2N derated 196 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Ambient temperature e Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F e Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if PN and I2N derated to 9096 Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if PN and I2N derated to 8096 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if PN and I2N derated to 6596 to 5096 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACB530 U1 032A 6 ACB530 U1 062A 6 Relative humidity 5 9596 no condensation allowed MN796 ACB530 Technical Specifications A 3 Table A 1 Ambient Environmental Requirements Storage and transportation in the NENNEN Ae protective package Contamination levels e No conductive dust allowed IEC 721 3 3 e The ACS550 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Storage e No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 1C2 e Solid particles Class 182 Transportation No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 3C2 Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 382 e Solid particles Class 252 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 p
23. U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 4 5 9 Disconnecting the Internal EMC Filter On certain types of systems you must disconnect the internal EMC filter otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which might cause danger or damage the drive Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible The following table shows the installation rules for the EMC filter screws in order to connect or disconnect the filter depending on the system type and the frame size For more information on the different system types see IT Systems on and Corner Grounded TN Systems The locations of screws EM1 and EMS are shown in Figure 4 1 The locations of screws F1 and F2 are shown in Figure 4 2 4 10 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 Table 4 3 IT systems ungrounded or Symmetrically grounded TN Corner grounded Phe TTE systems TRS systems TN systems Mah reason ne EM 0 0 ox E x e 6 _ m A A ee EEUU RR E F x 2 x Install the screw EMC filter will be connected Replace the screw with the provided polyamide screw EMC filter will be disconnected Remove the screw EMC filter will be disconnected 1 ACB530 U1 drives are shipped with screw EM3 already removed R5 R6 4 6 Drive s Power Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals Table 4 4 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2
24. Use motor rated voltage and perform motor model calc If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm eg 60 V per 1000 rpm the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 3 60 V 180 V motor rated amps parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 I2N A motor rated frequency parameter 9907 motor rated speed parameter 9908 motor rated hp parameter 9909 Select the calc motor model method parameter 9910 The default value O using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications it is applied in this basic set up procedure Note that this requires parameter 9904 to be set to Vector Speed If your selection is NO move to the next step Value YES should be selected if the operation point is near zero speed and or REM UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR RATED VOLT 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9906 MOTOR RATED AMPS 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM U PAR EDIT 9907 MOTOR RATED FREQ 0 0 Hz 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM PAR EDIT 9908 MOTOR RATED SPD rpm 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9909 MOTOR RATED HP 1 0 HP 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9910 CALC MOTOR MODEL 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required 8 3 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 1 2 3 IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH MO
25. e See DI1 above COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal e See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal e See DI1 INV above Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality Drive started START STOP COMMAND Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL 1608 8 1609 l 1 li Parameters 1 1 1 P Relay 1 Relay energized STARTED de energized RELAY STATUS Group 14 Damper open f Damper 1 I y closed_ DAMPER P Damper i gt STATUS amper Damper opening closing time time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the Damper 1 1 1 I 1 closed T l damper is fully opened i Parameter 1601 1 I L 1 1 I i I I I MOTOR STATUS 1 at gt Acceleration Drive coasts ime to stop Par 2202 NOTE START ENABLE 1 1608 can only be modified if the drive is stopped MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 27 Parameter Number Group Selection Value SYSTEM START ENABLE 2 1609 CONTROLS Continued D
26. 00 ENTER Go to the I O settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC t1 O SETTI NOS l CA i i DI G TAL NPUIS and and pressing E A NADOS P NBUT uu RELAY OUTPUTS Ra ANa a OUTPUTS AOUT EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys 43 and and press LOC v1 O SETTI NGS After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection yo Dl 3 EXIT 00 00 press 5 1001 EXT1 COMVANDS 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the setting with keys lt 4 and Y 2 Pressing the key LOC UPAR EDIT m IE or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value 1001 EXT1 COMVANDS n i i i i 2 ng the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default CANCEL 00 00 SAVE SAVE To save the new value press Y LoC LO SETTING e To cancel the new value and keep the original press gag 1001 START STOP El Ve D 1001 DIR El at 00 00 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys and Y LOC UPAR ED T MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 17 6 18 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 7 1 Parameters Parameter Number Selection Value START UP LANGUAGE 9901 DATA Group OPERATING MODE 9902 CONTROL TYPE 9904 MOTOR RATED VOLTS 9905 MN796 ACB530 Chapter 7 Parameter Descriptions
27. 0124 Read Only Range 0 0 20 0mA AO 2 0125 Read Only Range 0 0 20 0mA PID 1 OUTPUT 0126 Read Only Range 1000 0 to 1000 096 PID 1 SETPNT 0128 Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 PID 1 FBK 0130 Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 PID 1 DEVIATION 0132 Read Only Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 COMM RO WORD 0134 Read Only Range 0 65535 COMM VALUE 1 0135 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 COMM VAULE 2 0136 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 PROCESS VAR 1 0137 Read Only Range PROCESS VAR 2 0138 Read Only Range PROCESS VAR 3 0139 Read Only Range RUN TIME 0140 Read Only Range 0 00 499 99 kh MWH COUNTER 0141 Read Only Range 0 65535 MWh B 2 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value START REVOLUTION CNTR 0142 Read Only UP DATA Range 0 65535 Mrev Continued DRIVE ON TIME HI 0143 Read Only Range 0 65535 days DRIVE ON TIME LO 0144 Read Only Range 00 00 00 23 59 58 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting Read Only MOTOR TEMP 0145 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501 4 0 to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 CB TEMP 0150 Read Only Range 20 0 to 150 0 C MOT THERM STRESS Read Only 0153 Range 0 0 100 096 PID COMM VALUE 1 0158 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 PID COMM VAL
28. 12796 10096 P3008 50 xX 63 r 7 Zero speet load t f E T gt Motor thermal time constant P 3009 8 23 6 1 Settings Parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ NOTE It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard l O on page 160 8 23 6 1 Settings Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME and 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 8 23 7 Earth fault protection The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection can be selected to be active during start and run or during start only An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 21 8 24 8 25 8 26 8 27 8 23 7 1 Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 8 23 8 Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected 8 23 8 1 Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Pre programmed faults 8 24 1 Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current 8 24 2 DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives 8 24 3 DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 8 24 4 Drive temperature The drive s
29. 25 Duty Three phase supply voltage 380 480V 04A1 4 470 120 oo 160 285 390 1500 06A9 4 2835 80 170 320 470 75 08A8 4 192 80 210 0 575 950 012A4 128 80 315 5900 860 1425 11000 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Table 4 10 500 600V Drives Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Resistance z Deceleration to Zero Rating Prcont p Continuous ON ACB530 U1 gt 60s ON see below Three phase supply voltage 500 600V 02A7 6 548 80 8 175 257 X 425 f 1462 03A6 6 373 80 137 257 37 X 624 2144 06A1 6 224 80 228 420 639 1040 3573 06A0 6 149 80 X 342 X 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 15 WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance 4 8 3 Symbols Ry 7 Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance to provide maximum breaking torque P Duty cycle based resistor power
30. 4 3 2 Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power supply specification Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 4 3 2 1 Using a line reactor An line reactor should be used in cases where unstable supply networks exist A line reactor can also be used to decrease the input fault current in case of an internal drive failure 4 3 3 Disconnecting Device for Isolation Install a hand operated input disconnect disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to regional applicable safety regulations Motor Compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible MN796 ACB530
31. 6403 AL2 SIGNAL 6404 100 101 178 AL2 SIGNAL BASE 6405 PEAK VALUE 6406 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 0 Range 0 65535 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACB530 begins transmitting response to the master request Default 0 Range 0000 FFFF hex Baldor Drives profile Baldor DRV LIM or Baldor DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word Default 0 Range 0000 FFFF hex Baldor Drives profile Baldor DRV LIM or Baldor DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Default 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range 100 178 NOT SELECTED No signal parameter logged for the peak value Logs parameter 0101 0178 Defines by number the signal logged for the peak value e Any parameter number in Group OPERATING DATA can be selected Eg 102 parameter 0102 SPEED Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 120 0s Defines the filter time in seconds for peak value logging Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL No reset selected DI Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI1 DI2 DI6 Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI2 DI6 RESET Reset loggers Parameter is set to NOT SEL DI1 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI1 DI2 INV DI6 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI2 DI6
32. 7 227 325 7 279 802 7 372 696 D511 150 D541 745S CE Guidelines C 3 C 4 CE Guidelines ACB530 MN796 Chapter D Options and Kits D 1 Options and Kits for the ACB530 Several standard Options Kits are available for the ACB530 These include I O Options Keypad Mounting Kits Flange heat sink out Mounting Kits and Communication Options D 2 Optional Equipment and Accessories D 2 1 Option Option f ParNumber 115 230V Digital Input OHDI 01 The 115 230V Digital Input Interface module offers six 6 115V or three 3 Interface 230V rated relays mounted on a common board used to drive DI1 through DI6 of the ACB530 The 115 230V must be provided by the user Cabinet Keypad OPMP 01 Control Panel Mounting Platform allows remote mounting of the keypad on Mounting a large enclosure or remote panel The kit maintains UL Type 12 integrity of the mounting location Adapters 3 m 10ft cable and mounting hardware are included in this kit With this mounting arrangement the keypad is removable from the panel in a fashion identical to a drive mounted keypad Keypad Extension OCAT 01 7 foot CAT 5 patch cable allows remote operation of the standard panel Cable or connection of the drive to a Personal Computer using the RJ45 DB9 Adapter which must be purchased separately Control Keypad ACS H CP EXT Control Panel Mounting Kit for ACB530 drives allows remote mounting of Mounting the ACB530 keypad on the door of an enclosure The kit
33. ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 17 DCU profile Status word parameter 0304 FB STS WORD 2 Value 1 An alarm is on No alarms are on A maintenance request is pending No maintenance request Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked Direction lock is OFF Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked Local mode lock is OFF 1 Drive is in vector control mode O Drive is in scalar control mode Jogging function is active Jogging function is not active Control word requested from fieldbus No operation Reference 1 requested from fieldbus Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus Reference 2 requested from fieldbus 1 0 X Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus REQ REF2EXT External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus ACK STARTINH Start inhibit from fieldbus 0 No start inhibit from fieldbus E 10 4 State diagram ABB Drives profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above e When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the driv
34. Application Selecting the operating mode 9902 parameters associated to the operating mode Option Modules Activating the option modules Group Motor Temp Meas Group Panel Comm 9802 Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1103 EXT1 If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 2202 2203 Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Process Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 Control If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control 1001 1002 Control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601 Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1401 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control 4027 Set
35. Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DH Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel e Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 e Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD DIP 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DIP 2P e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward DIP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop e Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated
36. For flange mounting mounting the drive in a cooling air duct see the appropriate Flange Mounting Instructions Table 3 10 eee APA a FMK A R3 100000986 FMK B R3 100000994 FMK A R4 100000988 FMK B R4 100000996 ACS800 PNTGO1UEN 1 Not available in ACB530 01 series 3 5 Prepare to Mount the Drive 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of the mounting template provided with the drive 2 Drill the holes Figure 3 4 gt gt 1 4 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance 3 5 1 Remove the Front Cover 3 5 1 1 IP21 UL type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover 3 6 Installing the Drive MN796 ACB530 Figure 3 5 3 5 1 2 IP54 UL type 12 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding hood in place If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover Remove the cover RON Figure 3 6 MN796 ACB530 Installing the Drive 3 7 3 6 Mount the Drive 3 6 1 IP21 UL type 1 1 Position the ACB530 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACB530 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting hol
37. For the ACB530 the entire parameter set is mapped Holding Register as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACB530 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACB530 the entire parameter set is Holding Registers mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Multiple Holding Registers E 8 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACB530 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space ACB530 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes Contrast Bits Coils 0xxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils e Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 18 Preset Multiple 4
38. O PROTOCOL Range 0 0x FFFF EFB STATION ID 5302 Default 1 Range 0 65535 EFB BAUD RATE 5303 Default 9 6 kbits s Range 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 kbits s EFB PARITY 5304 Default O 8 NONE 1 Range 0 3 EFB CTRL PROFILE 5305 Default O ABB DRV LIM Range 0 2 EFB OK MESSAGES 5306 Default READ ONLY Range EFB CRC ERRORS 5307 Default READ ONLY Range EFB UART ERRORS 5308 Default READ ONLY Range EFB STATUS 5309 Default READ ONLY Range EFB PAR 10 5310 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 11 5311 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 12 5312 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 13 5313 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 14 5314 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 15 5315 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 16 5316 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 17 5317 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 18 5318 Default O Range 0 65535 EFB PAR 19 5319 Default O Range 0000 FFFF hex EFB PAR 20 5320 Default O Range 0000 FFFF hex LOAD PVL SIGNAL 6401 Default 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ ANALYZER Range 100 178 PVL FILTER TIME 6402 Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 120 0 s LOGGERS RESET 6403 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 7 AL2 SIGNAL 6404 Default 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range 100 178 AL2 SIGNAL BASE 6405 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 6404 Range PEAK VALUE 6406 Default Range B 14 Parameter Tables MN79
39. Stop the motor Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals according to step 1 or 2 or if possible according to the both steps 1 Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK 2 Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work Make sure that no other system like hydraulic crawling drives is able to rotate the motor directly or through any mechanical connection like felt nip rope etc Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the PE 1 4 2 General Safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment e The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local Baldor representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement e Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction e Ensure sufficient cooling 1 5 Unpacking The drive is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R1 shown in the figure below assistant keypad not shown e mounting template
40. current in percent of nominal current I2N 40 5096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 50 6096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 60 7096 distribution MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value LOAD AL1RANGE70TO80 6421 ANALYZER Continued AL1RANGES80TO90 6422 AL1RANGEOOTO 6423 AL2RANGE0TO10 6424 AL2RANGE10TO20 6425 AL2RANGE20TO30 6426 AL2RANGE30T040 6427 AL2RANGE40TO50 6428 AL2RANGES0TO60 6429 AL2RANGE60TO70 6430 AL2RANGE70TO80 6431 AL2RANGE80TOQ9O0 6432 AL2RANGE9OTO 6433 MN796 ACB530 Default Range 0 0 100 096 Parameter Name and Description Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 70 8096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 80 9096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N over 9096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 0 1096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 2 signal selection with parameter 6404 10 2096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096
41. e V F CONTROL mode Immediate start from zero frequency Identical to selection 8 RAMP DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque e V F CONTROL mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode Vector control modes Not applicable e V F CONTROL mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency Cannot be used in multimotor systems TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode V F CONTROL mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference n the beginning the motor magnetizes withi
42. parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters Using the control panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 Press EDIT Press UP and DOWN at the same time Press SAVE poo mM 9 5 2 Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is e Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not alwaysrequired Use the table in section Alarm listing following to find and address the root cause of the problem MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 2 Table 9 1 Alarm Listing Alarm 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load e Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct e Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply e Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either e Do not attempt to change the direction of mo
43. 0 7 decimal PREVIOUS FAULT 1 0412 Read Only Range As par 0401 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 0413 Read Only Range AS par 0401 START STOP EXT1 COMMANDS 1001 Default 2 DI1 2 DIR Range 0 10 EXT2 COMMANDS 1002 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 0 14 DIRECTION 1003 Default Range 1 JOGGING SEL 1004 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 s 6 REFERENCE KEYPAD REF SEL 1101 Default 1 SELECT Range 1 2 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1102 Default O Range 6 to 8 REF1 SELECT 1103 Default 1 Range 0 17 20 21 REF1 MIN 1104 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM REF1 MAX 1105 Default 60 0 62 0 Hz 1800 RPM Range 0 0 50 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM REF2 SELECT 1106 Default 2 Range 0 17 19 21 REF2 MIN 1107 Default 0 0 Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque REF2 MAX 1108 Default 100 0 Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque CONSTANT CONST SPEED SEL 1201 Default 9 SPEEDS Range 14 to 19 CONST SPEED 1 1202 Default 6 0 Hz 360 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CONST SPEED 2 1203 Default 12 0 Hz 720 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting B 4 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value CONSTANT CONST SPEED 3 1204 Default 18 0 Hz 1080 RPM SPEEDS Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Continued CONST SPEED 4 1205 Default 24 0 Hz 1440 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 H
44. 0307 FAULT WORD 1 WORD 2 WORD 3 OVERCURRENT EFB 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 DEV OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE USER LOAD 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting 0 1 5 6 7 e 9 10 11 3 4 5 7 1 1 2 1 Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 e See parameter 0305 Read Only Range Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 e See parameter 0305 Read Only Range e When an alarm is active the corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displaysl as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Read Only Range See parameter 0308 eis 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 o OVERCURRENT Resemed 4 iocoww START ENABLE 7 MISSING 6 azLoss EMERGENCY STOP s pevceoveRTEMe FIRST START a moron temp reseve Parameter Descriptions 7 9 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value FAULT LAST FAULT 0401 HISTORY Group FAULT TIME 1 0402 FAULT TIME 2 0403 SPEED AT FLT 0404 FREQ AT FLT 0405 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0406 CURRENT AT FLT 0407 TORQUE AT FLT 0408
45. 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30V Max contact voltage 30VDC 250VAC Max contact current power 6A 30VDC 1500VA 250VAC Max continuous current 2Arms cos 1 1Arms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500mW 12V 10mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5kVrms 1 minute Cable Specifications See section Control Terminals table Relays Digital Outputs 5 2 Selecting the Control Cables 5 2 1 General Rules Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire shield temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above Figure 5 1 Double shielded Single shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables For digital and analog I O cables twist the shield together into a bundle pig tail not longer than five times its width and connect it to terminal X1 1 at the drive end Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected For connecting the shield wires of the RS485 cable see the instructions and notes in section Mechanical and electrical installation EFB Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible e Stay at least 20cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same c
46. 178 SUPERV 2 LIM LO 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 3206 SUPERV 3 PARAM 3207 100 101 178 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 3209 INFORMATION FIRMWARE 3301 LOADING PACKAGE 3302 TEST DATE 3303 DRIVE RATING 3304 PARAMETER TABLE 3305 7 46 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected Selects parameter 0101 0178 Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 Range Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 Range Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Default 105 Parameter 0105 TORQUE Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected Selects parameter 0101 0178 Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Range Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Range Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above
47. 203 80 25 104 3e 119 o a2 es 22 s7 em 91 262 109 296 113 40 18 1 ACB530 x1 246A 4 and ACB530 01 290A 4 979mm 38 5 in Figure 3 3 Outside Dimensions Drives with IP54 UL type 12 Enclosures Type ACB530 01 290A 4 IP54 UL type 12 not available frame size R6 o zu 92 25 97 264 na 99 122 s 122 428 167 1 ACB530 01 290A 4 1119mm 44 1 in 2 UL type 12 not available for ACB530 01 290A 4 3 4 2 Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with ratings or options are minor Table 3 8 PzWULupei 65 43 9o 198 160 350 240 539 349 750 6 0 1520 saul ype ia Bo 1768 no 243 170 375 260 573 42 0 930 86 19020 1 ACB530 x1 246A 4 IP21 UL type 1 70 kg 154 Ib ACB530 01 290A 4 IP21 UL type 1 80 kg 176 Ib 2 ACB530 x1 246A 4 IP54 UL type 12 80 kg 176 Ib ACB530 01 290A 4 IP54 90 kg 198 Ib UL type 12 not available MN796 ACB530 Installing the Drive 3 5 Table 3 9 Frame Size Mounting Hardware R1 R4 m we on WARNING Before installing the ACB530 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off
48. 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Default 1 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency e See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Ramp is linear Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Not selected DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero after which the speed will stay at O De activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 e See DI1 above COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 DI1 INV Defines inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 e De activating the digital input forces the speed to 0 e Activating the digital input speed control resumes normal operation DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0 e See DI1 INV above Defines control for forcing the speed to O with the currently used deceleration ramp see parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Default 5 00 Range 0 00 200 00 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller e Larger values may cause speed osci
49. 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 3 210V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference rO 5 Al2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID 0 10V gt 0 100 PID setpoint 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Dp 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA Note 3 EF 9 AGND Analog output circuit common The sensor for AI2 is powered exter nally See the manufacturer s instruc 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC tions To use sensors supplied by the 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common drive aux voltage output 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 2 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 2 17 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 18 DI6 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A fx Default operation Note 2 Code 21lRO18 Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DB TDI Output 23 RO2A Default operation 0 0 Reference through AN 24 RO2B8 j Running gt 22 connectedto24 erp 1202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 HH CONST SPEED 2 1203 26 RO3A A Default operation 1 7 CONST SPEED 3 1204 27lROSB Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 conn
50. 3018 Range 0 3 COMM FAULT TIME 3019 Default 3 0 s Range 0 0 600 0 s Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 WIRING FAULT 3023 Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 CB TEMP FAULT 3024 Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 AUTOMATIC NUMBER OF TRIALS Default O RESET 3101 Range 0 5 TRIAL TIME 3102 Default 30 0 s Range 1 0 600 0 s DELAY TIME 3103 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 120 0 s AR OVERCURRENT 3104 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 AR OVERVOLTAGE 3105 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Default 0 DISABLE 3106 Range 0 1 AR AI lt MIN 3107 Default 0 DISABLE Range 0 1 AR EXTERNAL FLT 3108 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 SUPERVISION SUPERV 1 PARAM 3201 Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 3202 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 Range SUPERV 1 LIM HI 3203 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3201 Range SUPERV 2 PARAM 3204 Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 9 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting Parameter Number Selection Value SUPERVISION SUPERV 2 LIM HI 3206 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3204 Continued Range SUPERV 3 PARAM 3207 Default 105 Parameter 0105 TORQUE Range 100 N
51. 4 0 to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 USERLOAD USER LOAD C MODE Default 0 NOT SEL CURVE 3701 Range 0 3 USER LOAD C FUNC Default 1 FAULT 3702 Range 1 2 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 Default 20 s Range 10 400s LOAD FREQ 1 3704 Default 5 Hz Range 0 500 Hz LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3705 Default 10 Range 0 600 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 Default 300 Range 0 600 LOAD FREQ 2 3707 Default 25 Hz Range 0 500 Hz LOAD TORQ LOW 2 3708 Default 1596 Range 0 60096 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 Default 300 Range 0 60096 LOAD FREQ 3 3710 Default 43 Hz Range 0 500 Hz LOAD TORQ LOW 3 3711 Default 25 Range 0 600 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 Default 300 Range 0 600 LOAD FREQ 4 3713 Default 50 Hz Range 0 500 Hz MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 11 Parameter Number Group Selection Value USER LOAD LOAD TORQ LOW 4 3714 Default 30 CURVE Range 0 600 Continued TOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 Default 300 Range 0 600 LOAD FREQ 5 3716 Default 500 Hz Range 0 500 Hz LOAD TORQ LOW 5 3717 Default 3096 Range 0 60096 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 Default 300 Range 0 60096 PROCESS PID GAIN 4001 Default 1 0 SET 1 Range 0 1 100 0 INTEGRATION TIME 4002 Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s DERIVATION TIME 4003 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 10 0s PID DERIV FILTER 4004 Default 1 0 s Range 0 0 10 0s ERROR VALUE INV 4
52. 8 23 3 Panel loss 8 23 4 External faul tection TUNCIONS EE ener oe Read ci dated x XXE POR A Roo aL Os UP TP 8 23 5 Stall protection uiu dod e E acea E o Od aa eos e e ak 8 23 6 Motor therm al protection uio puces posae ios ace ael d ate ia uec adn dnos 8 23 7 Earth fa lt protection sois dese a RE duke a ead RUE ERR Era 8 29 8 Incorrect WING e dcos RP reca Anse AR NOE baa eaa atin ie a el URP ee d drca 8 24 Pre programmed faults 2 4 c rei m rh RE REG RR eee RESP RE T d exe E eREE ode 8 24 1 Overcurrent 8 24 2 DC overvoltage icc use e dure eee be er eoe BR a ep IR eee dne 8 24 3 DC undervol o PH 8 24 4 Drive temperat re i444 tac dr oen ice eub deno Ree not EUR Bre i dE EAR edes aa 8 24 5 Short circuit 8 24 6 Internal fault 8 25 Operation limits 8 25 1 Settings 8 26 Power limit 8 27 Automatic resets 8 27 1 Settings 8 27 2 Diagnostics 8 28 Supervisions 8 28 1 Settings 8 28 2 Diagnostics 8 29 Parameter lock 8 29 1 Settings 8 30 PID control 8 304 Block diagrams mi ull suia ae oe wine s xor aC dece ov OR ee qe Y da 8 30 2 Settings 8 30 3 Diagnostics 8 31 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control 1 0 eee BB 8 31 1 Example 8 31 2 Settings 8 32 Motor temperature measurement through the standard l 0 o ooooococococcoocronoooo 8 32 1 Settings 8 32 4 Diagnostics 8 33 Jogging 8 33 1 Settings 8 3
53. DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 above COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal e See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable e f this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 INV above Selects the source of the run enable signal NOTE RUN ENABLE 1601 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 1 OPEN Range 0 2 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values e The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory Determines if the control panel can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inp
54. EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence 1 Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION ENABLED Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run enable OPERATION signal must be active see parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run enable signal OPERATION INHIBITED Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP OUT 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATION ZERO ENABLED ABB DRV RFG OUT ZERO Force Ramp function generator output to zero FULL Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp function generator output held RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Norma
55. FAX 816 587 3735 NEW YORK AUBURN ONE ELLIS DRIVE AUBURN NY 13021 PHONE 315 255 3403 FAX 315 253 9923 NORTH CAROLINA GREENSBORO 1220 ROTHERWOOD ROAD GREENSBORO NC 27406 PHONE 336 272 6104 FAX 336 273 6628 OHIO CINCINNATI 2929 CRESCENTVILLE ROAD WEST CHESTER OH 45069 PHONE 513 771 2600 FAX 513 772 2219 OHIO Continued CLEVELAND 8929 FREEWAY DRIVE MACEDONIA OH 44056 PHONE 330 468 4777 FAX 330 468 4778 OKLAHOMA TULSA 5555 E 71ST ST SUITE 9100 TULSA OK 74136 PHONE 918 366 9320 FAX 918 366 9338 OREGON PORTLAND 12651 SE CAPPS ROAD CLACKAMAS OR 97015 PHONE 503 691 9010 FAX 503 691 9012 PENNSYLVANIA PHILADELPHIA 1035 THOMAS BUSCH MEMORIAL HIGHWAY PENNSAUKEN NJ 08110 PHONE 856 661 1442 FAX 856 663 6363 PITTSBURGH 159 PROMINENCE DRIVE NEW KENSINGTON PA 15068 PHONE 724 889 0092 FAX 724 889 0094 TENNESSEE MEMPHIS 4000 WINCHESTER ROAD MEMPHIS TN 38118 PHONE 901 365 2020 FAX 901 365 3914 TEXAS DALLAS 2920 114TH STREET SUITE 100 GRAND PRAIRIE TX 75050 PHONE 214 634 7271 FAX 214 634 8874 HOUSTON 10355 W LITTLE YORK ROAD SUITE 300 HOUSTON TX 77041 PHONE 281 977 6500 FAX 281 977 6510 UTAH SALT LAKE CITY 2230 SOUTH MAIN STREET SALT LAKE CITY UT 84115 PHONE 801 832 0127 FAX 801 832 8911 WISCONSIN MILWAUKEE 1960 SOUTH CALHOUN ROAD NEW BERLIN WI 53151 PHONE 262 784 5940 FAX 262 784 1215 INTERNATIONAL SALES FORT SMITH AR P 0 BOX 2400 FORT
56. Hz Defines the minimum limit for the drive NE 2007 values 0 output frequency A positive or zero minimum frequency A AA Time value defines two ranges one positive and one negative Poor A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Freq 2007 value is gt _0 See the figure P2008 AA NOTE Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ Frequency range allowed NOTE MINIMUM FREQ 2007 can only be i O modified if the drive is stopped p 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 Default 60 0 62 0 Hz Range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency NOTE MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 300 096 Range 600 0 to 0 096 Sets the first minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Default 300 096 Range 0 0 to 600 0 Sets the first maximum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameter Descriptions 7 29 Group Parameter Number START STOP START FUNCTION 2101 STOP FUNCTION 2102 DC MAGN TIME 2103 7 30 Parameter Descriptions Selection Value Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 8 RAMP Range 0 0 to 600 0 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor
57. Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 11 8 12 8 13 Actual signals Several actual signals are available e Drive output frequency current voltage and power Motor speed and torque Intermediate circuit DC voltage Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter h kWh counter Digital I O and analog I O status PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant keypad display one signal on the basic keypad display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs 8 11 1 Settings 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control pane 8 11 2 Diagnostics Actual Signal Additional information Groups 01 OPERATING DATA Lists of actual signals 04 FAULT HISTORY Motor identification The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start up A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start command is given During this first start up the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created This identification method is suitab
58. OFF Disables the Start inhibit function ON Enables the Start inhibit function Sets the Start inhibit function on or off If the drive is not actively started and running the Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required A fault is reset e Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 31 Group Parameter Number START STOP EMERG STOP SEL 2109 Continued TORQ BOOST CURR 2110 ZERO SPEED DELAY 2112 START DELAY 2113 7 32 Parameter Descriptions Selection Value Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 6 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 above DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Acti
59. OFF2 CONTROL Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode OPERATION ENABLED Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run enable signal must be active see parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run enable signal OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP OUT NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ENABLED ZERO RFG OUT ZERO Force Ramp function generator output to zero UD Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp function generator output held INHIBIT 1 OPERATION 2 OFF3 CONTROL E 14 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 Value Commanded State RFG INP
60. OPERATION INHIBITED XXX X1 xx xxxx x111 i gt B Cc D READY TO E OPERATE SW Bit1 1 CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 A E C State CW Bit5 0 CWxooxx x1 00001 1111 ms State change ie Bit4z1 mee Path described in example RFG OUTPUT CW Control word ENABLED SW Status word E CW Bit6 0 y r RFG Ramp function generator Kem x Mos aft 1111 Par 0104 CURRENT 0103 OUTPUT FREQ RFG ACCELERATOR f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ ENABLED n Speed G E Supported only by ABB DRV FULL CWx00x x1 Xx x111 1111 profile ie Bit6 1 State transition also occurs if the fault OPERATING SW Bit8 1 is reset from any other source eg digital input E 17 5 Reference Scaling E 30 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the Baldor drives profile as shown in the following table Reference EN RN REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 1104 1105 Actual frequency 0 0 20000 par 1105 motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 32767 20000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 1107 1108 Actual frequency 0 0 410000 par 1108 motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 32767 10000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque 1 0 0 10000 par 1108 or 2016 2018 torqu
61. PNP or NPN configuration Figure 5 2 PNP Connection Source NPN Connection Sink X1 X1 10 24V 0 z24V r 11 GND 1 IGND L 112 DCOM 2 DCOM 13 DI1 13 IDI 14 DI2 4 IDI2 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 6 DI4 17 DI5 7 IDIS 18 DI6 8 IDI6 5 3 Reinstall the Cover 5 8 1 IP21 UL Type 1 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screw Reinstall the keypad Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run To Figure 5 3 MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 3 5 3 2 1P54 UL Type 12 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover Slide the hood down over the top of the cover Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the two screws that attach the hood Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the keypad oP ONS Note The keypad window must be closed to comply with IP54 UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the keypad window 7 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run Figure 5 4 5 4 Application Operating Modes Operating modes change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use operating modes to minimize the need for manual editing of parame
62. Power Wiring 4 1 Table 4 1 Motor Nominal current Motor current is within this range Type designation label on drive entry for 0 2 2 0 lond long drive heavy duty current Output long or Type designation on drive and rating table in chapter Technical data on page 271 Voltage range Motor is compatible with the ACB530 voltage 208 240 V for ACB530 X1 XXXX 2 or range 380 480 V for ACB530 X1 XXXX 4 or 500 600 V for ACB530 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either the motor complies For ACB530 U1 XXXX 6 with NEMA MG1 Part 31 or a dv at filter is used between the motor and drive 4 4 Grounding the Drive 4 4 1 Ground Connections For personnel safety proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission immunity the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site e Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations e Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations e Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations e In multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series 4 4 2 Ground Fault Protection ACB530 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature can be dis
63. Range 0 0 1800 0 s RAMP SHAPE 1 2204 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 to 1000 0 s ACCELER TIME 2 2205 Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s DECELER TIME 2 2206 Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s RAMP SHAPE 2 2207 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 to 1000 0 s EMERG DEC TIME 2208 Default 1 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s RAMP INPUT 0 2209 Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 SPEED PROP GAIN 2301 Default 5 00 CONTROL Range 0 00 200 00 INTEGRATION TIME 2302 Default 0 50 s Range 0 00 600 00 s DC HOLD SPEED 2105 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 7 Parameter Number Selection Value SPEED DERIVATION TIME 2303 Default O ms CONTROL Range 0 10000 ms Continued Acc COMPENSATION Default 0 00 s 2304 Range 0 00 600 00 s AUTOTUNE RUN 2305 Default O OFF Range 0 1 CRITICAL CRIT SPEED SEL 2501 Default O OFF SPEEDS Range 0 1 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2502 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CRIT SPEED 2 LO 2504 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CRIT SPEED 2 HI 2505 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CRIT SPEED 3 LO 2506 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM CRIT SPEED 3 HI 2507 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM MOTOR FLUX OPT ENABLE 2601 Default O OFF
64. SMITH AR 72902 PHONE 479 646 4711 FAX 479 648 5895 CANADA EDMONTON ALBERTA 4053 92 STREET EDMONTON ALBERTA T6E 6R8 PHONE 780 434 4900 FAX 780 438 2600 TORONTO OAKVILLE ONTARIO 2750 COVENTRY ROAD OAKVILLE ONTARIO L6H 6R1 PHONE 905 829 3301 FAX 905 829 3302 MONTREAL QUEBEC 5155 J ARMAND BOMBARDIER SAINT HUBERT QU BEC CANADA J3Z 164 PHONE 514 933 2711 FAX 514 933 8639 VANCOUVER BRITISH COLUMBIA 1538 KEBET WAY PORT COQUITLAM BRITISH COLUMBIA V3C 5M5 PHONE 604 421 2822 FAX 604 421 3113 WINNIPEG MANITOBA 54 PRINCESS STREET WINNIPEG MANITOBA R3B 1K2 PHONE 204 942 5205 FAX 204 956 4251 MEXICO LEON GUANAJUATO KM 2 0 BLVD AEROPUERTO LEON GUANAJUATO CP37545 MEXICO FAX 52 477 761 2010 x 96 ACB 5 50 1212 x BALDOR AAA A MEMBER OF THE ABB GROUP P O Box 2400 Fort Smith AR 72902 2400 U S A Ph 1 479 646 4711 Fax 1 479 648 5792 International Fax 1 479 648 5895 Baldor Dodge 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 U S A Ph 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 www baldor com O Baldor Electric Company All Rights Reserved MN796 ACB530 12 12
65. Set parameter 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT EXT REF 1 MIN EXT REF 1 MAX AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 Al2 configured for joystick operation as the reference source See above Al1 JOYST description DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 Al1 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 Al1 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control
66. Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current 2 T AI 0 10V Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 3 9 p Al2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 iJi EX Jo AM 0 10 V 2f Al2 0 4 20 mA MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 5 5 4 2 ABB 3 Wire Operating Mode This operating mode is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the keypad start stop buttons are disabled Figure 5 6 ABB 3 Wire Operating Mode Connection Example X1 1 10 kohm A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAN External speed reference 1 0 10 V us 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA KD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 IGND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 IDCOM Digital input common for all 113 DI Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated s
67. Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated e Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated e Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands NOTE EXT1 COMMANDS 1001 can only be modified if the drive is stopped EXT2 COMMANDS 1002 Default O NOT SEL Range 0 14 Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above NOTE EXT2 COMMANDS 1002 can only be modified if the drive is stopped DIRECTION 1003 Default 3 Range 1 3 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Defines the control of motor rotation direction NOTE DIRECTION 1003 can only be modified if the drive is stopped JOGGING SEL 1004 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 6 NOT SEL Disables the jogging function DI1 Activates de activates jogging based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated jogg
68. Start up assistant In the Assistants mode you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 2 7 1 How to Use an Assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor set up assistant is used as an example EJ TS 1 MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing Y if you are in the Output mode otherwise by LOC UY MAI N MENU pressing E repeatedly until you get to the Main menu 5 EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu keys ca and LOC U ASSI STANTS 1 vw and pressing qu tart up assistant V Vot or Set up Appl i cati on Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 EXIT 00 00 SEL T SE REM UPAR EDIT 3 Select the assistant with keys 43 and and press X 9905 MOTOR RATED VOLT If you select any other assistant than the Start up assistant it guides you through 2 30 V the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the 1 Assistants mode The Motor set up assistant is used here as an example CANCEL 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up assistant it activates the first assistant which guides LOC wt CHO CE you through the task of specification of it
69. TCP and PROFINET Adapter IO network protocols Modbus TCP is a variant of the Modbus family of simple vendor neutral communication protocols intended for supervision and control of automation equipment Specifically it covers the use of Modbus messaging in an Ethernet environment using the TCP IP protocols The implementation of the Modbus TCP server in the RETA 02 module is done according to the Modbus TCP Specification 1 0 The Modbus TCP protocol allows the RETA 02 module to be used as an Ethernet bridge to control the drive The RETA 02 module supports eight simultaneous IP connections PROFINET IO uses traditional Ethernet hardware and software to define a network that structures the task of exchanging data alarms and diagnostics with Programmable Controllers and other automation controllers PROFINET IO can be thought as PROFIBUS on Ethernet PROFINET IO uses two different communication channels to exchange data with programmable controllers and other devices The standard TCP IP channel is used for parameterization configuration and acyclic read write operations The RT or Real Overview Time channel is used for standard cyclic data transfer and alarms There is no theoretical limit for the amount of connected nodes in PROFINET IO network but in practice the programmable controllers and number of available network addresses limits the size The PROFINET IO protocol is specified in the IEC standards 61158 and 61784 The communication wit
70. Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Parameter Name and Description Default O English Range 0 2 English Spanish French Selects the display language There are two different Assistant Control Panels each supporting a different language set Default 1 Range 1 6 ABB 2 Wire ABB 3 Wire Baldor 2 Wire Motor Pot Hand Auto PID Control Selects an application operating mode Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACB530 for a particular application NOTE OPERATING MODE 9902 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 2 Range 1 2 Open Vector sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 96 10096 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed V F Control scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 96 10096 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed Selects the motor control mode NOTE CONTROL TYPE 9904 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default U1 yyyy 2 230V U1 yyyy 4 460 V U1 yyyy 6 575 V Range U1 yyyy 2 11
71. Value Parameter Name and Description MOTOR DC STABILIZER 2619 Default O DISABLE CONTROL Range 0 1 Continued DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation FAULT AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3001 Default O NOT SEL FUNCTIONS Range 0 3 NOT SEL No response FAULT Displays a fault 7 Al LOSS or 8 Al2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 Al LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 LOSS or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used as the active reference source Group REFERENCE SELECT e as the Process or External PID controllers feedback or setpoint source Group PROCESS PID SET 1 Group PROCESS PID SET 2 3021 Al FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits t WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure
72. W2 Earthing PE Terminal Brk UDC Terminals Minimum Wire Size Maximum Wire Size Tightening Torque Maximum Wire Size _ Tightening Torque MTC O CA CA O IC RU ozs te 100 8 f ta 10 170 8 14 10 Eme ars pe pes f e fis fis f ioo fe f ie fio Crepes f o f soo f wo ss pte eo p tof o IR 180 1 Aluminum cable cannot be used with frame sizes R1 R5 because of its lower capacity 2 Aluminum cable cannot be used with type ACB530 U1 290A 4 because of the terminal size 3 See section Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size Note See the recommended cable sizes for different load currents in section Input Power Cables Wiring 4 6 1 Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size WARNING For R6 power terminals if screw on terminal lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95mm2 3 0AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive They require crimp on ring lugs as described below 4 6 2 Crimp On Ring Lugs On the R6 frame size if screw on terminal lugs are supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG or if no screw on terminal lugs are supplied at all use crimp on ring lugs according to the following procedure Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table Remove the screw on terminal lugs if supplied Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing
73. YES All of the above alarms are enabled Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage alarm e 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section Alarm listing Default 0 RPM Range 30000 to 30000 RPM Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed ui Te Speed 2001 value is lt 0 A positive or zero minimum speed Cen value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value Speed llowed peed range allowe ne defines one speed range P 2001 e See the figure NOTE MINIMUM SPEED 2001 can only Speed 2001 value is gt _ 0 be modified if the drive is stopped P 2002 Speed range allowed P2001 0 lime P 2001 mum Speed range allowed P 2002 Default 01 1500 RPM U1 1800 RPM Range 0 to 30000 RPM Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed NOTE MAXIMUM SPEED 2002 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 1 8 Range 0 1 8 Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor NOTE MAX CURRENT 2003 can only be modified if the drive is stopped MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value LIMITS OVERVOLT CTRL 2005 Continued Group UNDERVOLT CTRL 2006 MINIMUM FREQ 2007 MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MIN TORQUE 1 2015 MAX TORQUE 1 2017 MN796 ACB5
74. amperes 600 V maximum The ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508 Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACB530 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and for ACB530 U1 C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 300 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or hood for IP54 UL type 12 drives the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes Brake choppers when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built in brake chopper as standard equipment For frame sizes R3 R6 contact your Baldor representative for appropriate parts See section Brake components A 3 Ambient Conditions The following table lists the ACB530 environmental requirements
75. as used in ACS400 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly Parameter Descriptions 7 63 Parameter Number Group Selection Value EFB EFB CRC ERRORS 5307 PROTOCOL Continued EFB UART ERRORS 5308 EFB STATUS 5309 EFB PAR 10 5310 EFB PAR 11 5311 EFB PAR 12 5312 EFB PAR 13 5313 EFB PAR 14 5314 EFB PAR 15 5315 EFB PAR 16 5316 EFB PAR 17 5317 7 64 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive Default READ ONLY Range IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between
76. braking of a high inertia motor Brake resistor Dissipates the drive surplus braking energy conducted by the brake chopper to heat Essential part of the brake circuit See Brake chopper DC link capacitors Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage Introduction MN796 ACB530 Term abbreviation Explanation FECA Optional EtherCAT adapter module FENA Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet IP Modbus TCP and PROFINET IO protocols FMBA Optional Modbus RTU adapter module FPBA Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module Frame size Refers to drive physical size for example R1 and R2 To determine the frame size of a drive refer to the rating table in chapter Technical data FRSA RSA 485 adapter board Input Output ID run Identification run IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor Intermediate See DC link circuit Inverter Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage IT system Type of supply system that has no low impedance connection to ground earth LRFI Series of optional EMC filters LSW Least significant word Macro Pre defined default values of parameters in drive control program Each macro is intended for a specific application See Parameter User adjustable operation instruction to the drive or signal measured or calculated by the drive PLC PROFIBUS Registered trademarks of PI PROFIBUS amp PROFINET PROFIBUS DP International PROFINET
77. cable of the drive is protected with appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC 48 63Hz Max x 396 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Voltage U1 Prospective short circuit current IEC 629 Frequency mbalance Fundamental power factor cos phi 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum 4 7 2 Input Power Cables Wiring Input wiring can be any of e afour conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Drive s Power Connection Terminals The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table Table 4 7 Copper and Aluminum Cable Types for Different Load Currents IEC NEC Based on e NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires 90 C 194 F wire insulation Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 PVC insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e not more than three current carrying conductors in cables with concentric copper shield raceway or cable or earth directly buried not more
78. copy the reference KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Setting Calculation of the AI Reference C value B value 50 of reference value C value B value 50 of reference value C value 50 of reference value B value C value 5096 of reference value B value Where C Main reference value i COMM for values 9 10 and 120 F Al1 for values 14 17 100 B Correcting reference Al for values 9 10 and 80 Al2 for values 14 17 Example of The figure shows the reference source 40 curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where 20 e C 2596 0 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 e B varies along the horizontal axis NOTE REF1 SELECT 1103 can only be modified if the drive is stopped MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 15 Group REFERENCE SELECT Continued Parameter Number Selection Value REF1 MIN 1104 REF1 MAX 1105 REF2 SELECT 1106 7 16 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description D
79. depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press C gt ne hy le cae ene us li ing To start the drive in local control press lt gt The arrow U or O on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint 6 2 5 Output Mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 01 OPERATING DATA e change the direction of the motor rotation e set the speed frequency or torque reference e adjust the display contrast e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing wr repeatedly The top right corner of the display shows the reference value The center can be configured to show up to three mS signal values or bar graphs If just one or two signals ig 2 are selected for display the number and name of each Z 0 4 A displayed signal are shown in addition to the value or bar 24 4 95 graph See instructions on selecting and modifying the DIR 1 00 00 MENU _ monitored signals in par
80. end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table Use a tightening torque of 0 4N m 0 3Ib ft 12 Install the conduit gland box cover 1screw Figure 4 5 4 6 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 5 6 Wiring IP54 UL Type 12 Enclosure with Cables 1 Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive The conical part of the seals must face downwards when the seals are inserted in the lead through plate holes 2 On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires 3 On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp 4 Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps 5 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals See the table below on the right for tightening torques Figure 4 6 Tightening Torque Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size 6 Conne
81. includes a 10 ft 8 m CAT 5 patch cable gasket for NEMA 12 mounting hardware and drilling template NEMA 4X Cabinet ACS H CP EXT IP66 Allows remote mounting of the ACB CP BA Operator Panels on a larger Keypad Mounting NEMA 4X IP66 enclosure or remote panel The kit maintains NEMA 4X integrity of the mounting location All necessary hardware and a mounting template are provided in addition to a 3 m panel cable When mounted the operator is not removable from the front of the enclosure The operator panel must be purchased separately DeviceNet RDNA 01 The DeviceNet network uses a linear bus topology Terminating resistors Adapter are required on each end of the trunk line Drop lines as long as 6 meters 20 feet each are permitted allowing one or more nodes to be attached DeviceNet allows branching structures only on drop lines Profibus DP Adapter RPBA 01 PROFIBUS is an open serial communication standard that enables data exchange between all kinds of automation components The physical transmission medium of the bus is a twisted pair cable according to the RS 485 standard The maximum length of the bus cable is 100 to 1200 meters depending on the selected transmission rate Up to 31 stations can be connected to the same PROFIBUS system without the use of repeaters EtherCAT RECA 01 The RECA 01 module supports EtherCAT network protocol EtherCAT Adapter is a Real Time Ethernet technology which aims to maximize the use of t
82. lh hrs 3 4 1 Dimensions And Weights tii ad aia a N 34 2 Weight 2604 heeds eR ub RA ee WEE Leu REX RUE hide Bar RUN Rr eld 3 5 Prepare to Mount the Drive udin ds RUE Ree ee lA EUN dte 3 5 1 Remove the Front Cover cuerdo rua hr b Fu bg ETSI Ren per E PER 3 6 Mount the DIVE iia is Tex eave tt pergrata da ure un 3 6 1 IP21 7 UE type T 2er ro E a 3 6 2 IP547 UP type 12 00 cag dae A A A RR FE eh MN796 ACB530 Chapter 4 Power Wiring 4 1 Electrical Installation rri oT bee Sane ee A tod do ER dene o 4 1 1 What this Chapter Contalhns vos ic a a ROS A AAA 4 2 Checking the Insulation of the Assembly o oooooocoorcocorr Rh 4 2 1 Drive 4 3 Planning the Electrical Installation 60 RII 4 3 1 What this Section Contains llllseeeeeseeseeeeee I I nnn 4 3 2 Implementing the AC Power Line Connection sss eee 4 3 3 Disconnecting Device for Isolation llle II 4 4 Grounding the Drive disse epe er hn RR haere t ge ee Re e d RR EL A dg ba 44 1 Ground Connections zur ceo e eod ep e Rend e paene d eoa Dia RR a oe ca 4 4 2 Ground Fault Protection xicos da e CERRAR e RUP CR n 4 4 3 Grounding and Routing sissors orreaga nra Rr Rb ra ERRARE E XR PP VRRE REESE 4 5 Wiring Overview 4 5 1 Conduit Gland Kits icin cece bb e ts 4 5 2 Wiring Requirements canica tai iaaii ler hh hn 4 5 3 Instali the Wiring iod d up Fol sene a a o accede rete Atlee A ara da Ro ane Doa ps 4 5 4 Wiri
83. lt to return to the Par backup menu ccessful OK 00 00 LOC uUPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters fu set To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par backup menu with keys 4 and e and press The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 25 if you want to stop the operation m IPPO M ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE arameter down After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press to return to the Par backup menu MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 15 6 2 11 2 How to View Information about the Backup ay Go to the Main menu by pressing NO if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing wy repeatedly until you get to the Main menu L Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys 4 and y gt and pressing qum b Select Pal INFO on the Par backup menu with keys and y and press The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE DRIVE RATING type of the drive rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX Nominal current rating If present an A indicates a decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A Y 2 200V 4 400 V 6 600 V Z i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the in
84. noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment E 10 2 Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 Name Value Commanded State Comments OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205
85. o spe de RR ERE RR o 4 9 4 Emergency Stop Devices 1 2 06 ee eh hun 4 10 Fuses 4 11 Check Installation 4 10 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 13 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 17 4 17 4 18 4 18 4 19 4 20 MN796 ACB530 Chapter 5 Control Wiring 5 1 Control Connection Specifications ooooooorooreacanr eee 5 1 51 1 What this chapter Contains 2 0 daa id e as 5 1 5 2 Selecting the Control Gables 0 04004 40 bed bee a iaa E aa 5 1 5 2 1 General RUIS eda a RR RR RA AAA A A EUR A 5 1 5 2 2 Drive s Control Connection Terminals oo ooocoocooocorr e 5 2 5 2 3 Control Terminals Table xm pires aa ek RERO Aa a A RR ADR A AA 5 2 5 3 Reinstall thi GOVOl c ur ausis ue eee eben eect tek aos A sae us aacra Sun Add 5 3 5 3 2 1P54 UL Type 12 ia ic e ii ia tb d 5 4 5 4 Application Operating Modes ooocooococronnr eR nnn 5 4 5 4 1 ABB 2 Wire Operating Mode oocooccoocooocroa eese nnn 5 5 5 4 2 ABB 3 Wire Operating Mode oooooccoocnoorrerr e nen 5 6 5 4 3 Baldor 2 Wire Operating Mode oo ooooooocoornocerernn eI nnn 5 7 5 4 4 Motor Potentiometer Operating Mode slseleel eh 5 8 5 4 5 Hand Auto Operating Mode ee eee er em HX EE RR RR Re 5 9 5 4 6 PID Control Operating Mode lssleueeseesseeeeeel e rn 5 10 5 6 Operating Mode Default Values for Parameters lees 5 12 Chapter 6 Using the Keypad 6 1 Keypads ecole eR
86. parameter 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL PIDCtriActive Parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO PID CONTROL modulating Drive IGBT control is operating 8 26 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 31 1 Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function Motor speed A ty Sleep delay 4024 ERA ty 1 QD qM P Control panel display i Sleep level i 40238 No JJ NM PID SLEEP t Stbp Start Actual value i i4 Wake up delay 4026 Wake up deviation 4025 t Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed 8 31 2 Settings Parameter Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 Sleep function settings MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 27 8 32 Motor temperature measur
87. pressing gt repeatedly until you get there 60 0 Hz 1 0 A 26 DIR 00 00 MENU O Press to start the Motor Model Calc The panel keeps switching LOC UALARM between the display that was shown when you started the Motor Model Calc and the alarm display presented on the right ALARM 2019 Retos REO RETARD In general it is recommended not to press any keypad keys during the Motor 00 00 Model Calc However you can stop the Motor Model Calc at any time by E pressing O After the Motor Model Calc is completed the alarm display is not shown any LOC FAULT more FAULT 11 MOTOR MODEL FAIL 1 00 00 If the Motor Model Calc fails the fault display presented on the right is shown 8 4 Program features The section describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages 8 4 1 Start up assistant 8 4 1 1 Introduction The Start up assistant requires the assistant keypad guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task Language select automatically The user may activate the tasks
88. rating watts where x is ON time 4 8 4 Installing and Wiring Resistors All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See section Power Connection diagrams for the resistor cable connection points 4 8 5 Mandatory Circuit Protection The following setup is required for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving dynamic breaking chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example Figure 4 15 L1 L2 L3 1 LL Off E gt Fuses 2 1 3 5 13 3 vo ee one 2 4 6 i 14 4 gt J 5 E ACB30 U1 V1 Wl To Thermal switch standard in ABB resistors 4 8 6 Parameter Set Up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE 4 9 Motor C
89. rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating rcont ACB530 01 U1 Pus Pao P 30 Continuous see below 3s ON lt 10sON 30s ON ON 60s ON gt 27 sOFF gt 50s OFF gt 180s OFF 420 s OFF lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty 10 Duty 17 Duty lt 14 Duty Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V Loma Jea fo Je Jo po po po Loses i0 feo ss ue fs o iso ma s fa us fs fjes o hoo 7 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 8 32 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 380 480 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating rcont ACB530 01 U1 Pig P40 P 30 Continuous see below lt 3s ON lt 10 s ON 30 s ON ON gt 60s ON gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty Lora aro uo e res 900 500 Lose ees feo wo se fo f ooo Fossa ise feo aw e ss e 4 3 Loma ve eo ss se se es sso Resistor time constant specification must be 85 seconds 500 600 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating poo Deceleration to zero rating ACB530 P 01 U1 Pr Prio P 30 r60 Continuous se
90. scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 0 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting WAKE UP DELAY 4026 Default 0 50 s Range 0 0 60 00 s ENERGY ENERGY PRICE 4502 Default 0 00 SAVING Range 0 00 655 35 CO2 CONV FACTOR 4507 Default 0 5 tn MWh Range 0 00 10 0 tn MWh PUMP POWER 4508 Default 100 096 Range 0 0 1000 096 ENERGY RESET 4509 Default 0 DONE Range 0 1 EXT COMM FBA TYPE 5101 Default READ ONLY MODULE Range FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Default O 5102 5126 Range 0 65535 FBA PAR REFRESH 5127 Default 0 DONE Range 0 1 FILE CPI FW REV 5128 Default READ ONLY Range FILE CONFIG ID 5129 Default READ ONLY Range FILE CONFIG REV 5130 Default READ ONLY Range FBA STATUS 5131 Default READ ONLY Range FBA CPI FW REV 5132 Default READ ONLY Range FBA APPL FW REV 5133 Default READ ONLY Range PANEL COMM STATION ID 5201 Default 1 Range 1 247 BAUD RATE 5202 Default 9 6 kbits s Range 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s PARITY 5203 Default 0 8 NONE 1 Range 0 3 OK MESSAGES 5204 Default READ ONLY Range PARITY ERRORS 5205 Default READ ONLY Range FRAME ERRORS 5206 Default READ ONLY Range BUFFER OVERRUNS Default READ ONLY 5207 Range CRC ERRORS 5208 Default READ ONLY Range MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 13 Parameter Number Selection Value EFB EFB PROTOCOL ID 5301 Default
91. source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1mA See Group MOTOR TEMP MEAS Output corresponds to a parameter in Group OPERATING DATA e Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 Defines the content for analog output AO1 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1501 Range Sets the minimum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the figure P 1505 P1511 P 1504 P 1510 1 P 1502 1508 AO CONTENT gt P 1503 1509 AO mA P 1505 P1511 P1504 a s lb SL P 1510 I l 1 AO CONTENT T P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1501 Range Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output Default 0 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA Sets the minimum output current Default 20 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA Sets the maximum output current Default 0 0s Range 0 0 10 0s Defines the filter time constant for AO1 The filtered signal reaches 6396 of a step change within the time specified e See the figure in parameter 13
92. systems are defined in the following table In such systems disconnect the internal ground connection through the EMC filter capacitors do this also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter Table 4 1 Corner grounded TN systems EMC filter must be disconnected Grounded at the corner of the Grounded at the mid point of a delta delta leg Single phase grounded at an Three phase Variac without end point solidly grounded neutral The EMC filter capacitors make an internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the system is symmetrically grounded the EMC filter may be connected For reference the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically grounded TN system TN S system 4 4 3 4 IT Systems WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For IT systems an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30ohm power system Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filter see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static
93. text e Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process E 26 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 26 DRIVE ID 290 EFB CON FILE 31 EFB 1 32 EFB2 33 EFB3 205 Reserved obsolete 207 EFB LOAD ERROR 1002 Reserved obsolete E 16 2 Serial Communications Diagnostics The FBA has diagnostic tools in addition to the drive fault codes Refer to the user manual shipped with the FBA module E 17 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 27 E 17 1 Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules E 17 2 Control Word As described earlier the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram shown later describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL
94. than nine cables laid on cable ladder side by side EN 602 Max Load Max Load Max Load Cu Cable Al Cable Cu Wire Size DRN s AS ae AWG koro 3x1 5 Aluminum cable cannot be 525 a ee because of its lower capacity 3x4 3x6 5031 ls ________ 3x10 jo83 e ____ 3x16 3x25 os fas J 119 3x50 117 153 3x70 143 3x95 165 3x120 191 249 3x150 218 3x185 257 3x240 274 lo 285 MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 13 4 8 Brake Components 4 8 1 Compatibility Braking availability for ACB530 drives varies by frame size as shown below e R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from Baldor e R3 through R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your Baldor District Office for appropriate parts 4 8 2 Selecting the Braking Resistors Frame Sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RMIN defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 15096 of heavy duty or 11096 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed RMAX If maximum braking torque is not necessary resisto
95. that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost PANEL COMM ERR 3002 Default 1 FAULT Range 1 3 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error Note When either of the two external control locations are active and start stop and or direction are through the control panel 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 8 KEYPAD the drive follows speed frequency reference according to the configuration of the external control locations instead of the value of the last speed or parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 V X JH WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 39 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description FAULT EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3003 Default O NOT SEL FUNCTIONS Range 6 to6 Continued NOT SEL External fault signal is not used DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input
96. the following as appropriate Table 4 1 U1 V1 W1 3 Phase Power Supply Input U2 V2 W2 Power Output to Motor The ACB530 U1 xxxx 2 208 240V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 e For frame size R6 see section Power Terminal Considerations R6 frame size to install the appropriate cable lugs For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Table 4 2 FrameSize Terminal Description Braking Accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking Resistor Braking resistor See section Brake Components Contact your local Baldor District Office to order either R3 R4 R5 R6 UDC UDC DC Bus e braking unit or e chopper and resistor 4 5 3 Install the Wiring 4 5 3 1 Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation WARNING Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the drive 1 Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500VDC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 10Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instr
97. the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See Power connection diagrams for the resistor cable connection points 8 34 4 Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts e Equip the drive with a main contactor e Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 1 Off E Fuses ll ll 2 1 3 5 13 3 d d Dee EMEN 2 4 6 i 14 4 I d ACSSSO amp 4 U1 V1 W1 la Thermal switch standard in ABB resistors K1 CJ 8 34 5 Parameter set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE 8 34 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 1 Fault Tracing 9 1 1 In this Chapter The chapter explains how to reset faults and view the fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions 9 2 Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the Safety Notices before you work on the drive 9 3 Diagnostic disp
98. to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Figure 5 9 Hand Auto Operating Mode Connection Example X1 1 10 kohm A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 IAN External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control a 43 AGND Analog input circuit common 1 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC q 5 AI2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 42447 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current O 20 mA 1319 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A x Default operation 21 RO1B Li Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 23 RO2A__ 1 Default operation The sensor for Al2 is powered 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connec
99. to error value changes e The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change e f the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant A O eae e es Controller output Ae Kp Tp 3 Ts Kp e Error value A A SE A Gain K 1 p 3 e Error value T Integration time gt 0 Kp e Tp Derivation time gt 0 t T Sample time period 2 ms L B Ae Error value change between two samples Ti Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 600 00 s Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation e Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration e 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action e Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine e The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp Acceleration compensation No acceleration compensation t gt Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation Parameter Descriptions 7 35 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value S
100. used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN e MINIMUM Al cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference e See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA e Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal e Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4mA 20mA 100 20 MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value ANALOG MAXIMUM Al1 1302 INPUTS Continued Group FILTER Al 1303 MINIMUM Al2 1304 MAXIMUM Al2 1305 FILTER Al2 1306 RELAY RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 OUTPUTS oar WO Iv 10 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 100 0 Range 0 0 100 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range e The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX e See the figure at parameter 1104 Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for analog Unfiltered signal inp
101. value PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1505L1504 or 1511L1510 8 9 Programmable digital inputs The drive has six programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input 8 9 1 Settings Group 10 START STOP DIR DI as start stop direction Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection or reference source Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run enable fault reset or user mode change signal 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal 2209 DI as zero ramp force signal 3003 3004 Dl as external fault source Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Dl in motor temperature measurement 4010 DI as PID controller reference signal source 4022 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1 8 10 Programmable relay output The drive has three programmable relay outputs With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link 8 10 1 Settings Parameter Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times 8 10 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0134 RO Control word through fieldbus control 8 14 Start Up
102. 0 0 tn MWh Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions kg kWh or tn MWh Used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn Default 100 096 Range 0 0 1000 096 Pump power as a percentage of the nominal motor power when connected directly to supply DOL Used for reference when energy savings are calculated e See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 e t is possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps The reference power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online Default 0 DONE Range 0 1 DONE RESET Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description EXT COMM FBA TYPE 5101 Default READ ONLY MODULE Range NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA PROFIBUS DP CANopen DEVICENET CONTROLNET ETHERNET PROFINET EtherCAT EPL Ethernet POWERLINK Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Defa
103. 00 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets value for Constant Speed 1 e The range and units depend on parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 OPEN VECTOR Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 2 V F CONTROL Default 12 0 Hz 720 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 18 0 Hz 1080 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 24 0 Hz 1440 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 30 0 Hz 1800 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 48 0 Hz 2880 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 60 0 Hz 3600 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is
104. 005 Default O NO Range 0 1 UNITS 4006 Default 4 Range 0 1 UNIT SCALE 4007 Default 1 Range 0 4 0 VALUE 4008 Default 0 0 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 100 VALUE 4009 Default 100 0 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 Parameter Name and Description User Setting SET POINT SEL 4010 Default 1 AI Range 0 2 8 17 19 INTERNAL SETPNT 4011 Default 40 0 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 SETPOINT MIN 4012 Default 0 096 Range 500 0 to 500 0 SETPOINT MAX 4013 Default 100 096 Range 500 0 to 500 0 FBK SEL 4014 Default 1 ACT1 Range 1 13 FBK MULTIPLIER 4015 Default 0 000 NOT SEL Range 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 to 32 767 ACT1 INPUT 4016 Default 2 Al2 Range 15 ACT2 INPUT 4017 Default 2 V Range 1 7 ACT1 MINIMUM 4018 Default 096 Range 1000 to 100096 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4019 Default 10096 Range 1000 to 100096 ACT2 MINIMUM 4020 Default 096 Range 1000 to 100096 B 12 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value PROCESS PID ACT2 MAXIMUM 4021 Default 10096 SET 1 Range 1000 to 100096 Continued SLEEP SELECTION 4022 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 PID SLEEP LEVEL 4023 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM PID SLEEP DELAY 4024 Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s WAKE UP DEV 4025 Default 0 0s Range Unit and
105. 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 4001 GAIN 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 6 05 600s j600s fsoos 600s 600s 5 12 Control Wiring MN796 ACB530 Chapter 6 Using the Keypad 6 1 Keypads 6 1 1 About Keypads Use a keypad to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters Assistant Keypad This keypad described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The keypad provides language support It is available with different language sets The manual is applicable to keypads with the keypad revisions and the keypad firmware versions given in the table below Keypad Type Type Code Keypad Revision Keypad Firmware Version Assistant Keypad ACB CP BA 2 04 or later To find out the keypad revision see the label on the back of the keypad An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below 1 ABB Oy ACS CP A S N M0935E0001 RoHS Manufacturer 09 10 11 for 2009 2010 2011 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 A B C for keypad revision Integer starting every week from 0001 the label of your drive shows the valid markings To find out the keypad firmware version of your assistant keypad See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the assistant keypad 6 2 Assistant Keypad 6 2 1 Features The assistant keypad features alpha numeric keyp
106. 02 ACCELER TIME 1 acceleration times will be used in the application 1 CANCEL 00 00 8 4 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 O Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2204 REM WPAR EDIT NOTE Deceleration time 2 parameter 2205 must also be set if two 2203 DECELER TIME 1 deceleration times will be used in the application 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 8 1 2 6 Saving a user mode and final check O The start up is now complete You can now set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user mode O Check that the drive state is OK Assistant Keypad Check that there are not faults or alarms shown on the display 1 Verify that the panel LED is green and does not blink THE DRIVE IS NOW READY FOR USE 8 1 3 Performing a Guided Start Up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the assistant keypad Guided start up is applicable to AC induction motors Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand 8 1 3 1 POWER UP O Apply input power The keypad will ask if you want to use the Start up assistant REM CHOICE Do you want to e Press X when YES is highlighted to run the Start up assistant nas rne start up e Press amp if you do not want to run the Start up assistant NO o ox EXIT 00 00 OK e Press v to highlight NO and then press X to select if the panel asks you to run the Start up a
107. 03 Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT Range 99 178 Defines the content for analog output AO2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value ANALOG AO2 CONTENT MIN 1508 OUTPUTS Continued Group AO2 CONTENT MAX 1509 MINIMUM AO2 1510 MAXIMUM AO2 1511 FILTER AO2 1512 SYSTEM RUN ENABLE 1601 CONTROLS PARAMETER LOCK 1602 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1507 Range Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1507 Range Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above Default 0 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above Default 20 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0s Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes DI2
108. 1 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 AAA e On off delays are ignored when relay Control event output 1401 is set to PFC Relay status T lL 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameter Descriptions 7 23 Group RELAY OUTPUTS Continued ANALOG OUTPUTS Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value RO 3 OFF DELAY 1409 AO1 CONTENT SEL 1501 99 100 101 178 AO1 CONTENT MIN 1502 AO1 CONTENT MAX 1503 MINIMUM AO1 1504 MAXIMUM AO1 1505 FILTER AO1 1506 AO2 CONTENT SEL 1507 7 24 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s Switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUPUT FREQ Range 99 178 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6mA See Group MOTOR TEMP MEAS EXCITE PT100 Provides a current
109. 1 0303 Read Only Range Read only copy of the Status Word 1 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 o READY ALARM o DECELERATE Reserved 7 AT SETPOINT cevcr 8 9 SUPERVISION CPY_REF2 REQ REF2EXT ACK STARTINH LIMIT 0303 FB STS 0304 FB STS WORD 1 WORD 2 FB STS WORD 2 0304 Read Only Range Read only copy of the Status Word 2 e See parameter 0303 7 8 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value FB ACTUAL FAULT WORD 1 0305 SIGNALS Continued FAULT WORD 2 0306 FAULT WORD 3 0307 ALARM WORD 1 0308 ALARM WORD 2 0309 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Read Only Range Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 e When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words e Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e See section Fault listing for a description of the faults e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Read Only Range 0305 FAULT 0306 FAULT
110. 1 RESET 0 gt 1 8 9 Notin use 1 M EXT CTRL LOC 1 0 1 N Switch to EXT2 OOOO Switch to EXT1 Run disable Inverted run enable Run enable on Normal Ramp stop mode Y STPMODE R 1 no op STPMODE EM 1 Emergency Ramp stop mode no op STPMODE C 1 1 Coast stop mode no op RAMP 2 Ramp pair 2 Oooo O RAMP_HOLD 1 Oooo O k r le N o al A oo E Ramp output to 0 Ramp freeze no op Ramp input to 0 no op no op Ramp pair 1 3 RAMP IN O JJ A E U O c zj o MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 15 ADCU profile Control word parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Bit Name Value Command Reg Information EQ LOCALLO 0 heoo A 15 TORQLIM2 3 Torquelmtpar2 O 0 Torque limit pair 1 DCU profile Control word parameter 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 CE E EEES These bits are only for supervision purposes 0 noo 0 noo z 0 Linkisdown 30 REQ STARTIN 1 Start inhibit request is H pending Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is the OFF button F pressed interlock INTERLOCK o noo S ooo o E 10 3 Status word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY ON 1 1 REA
111. 1 By default stores a copy of 0108 OUTPUT FREQ Use parameter 5310 to select a select using 5310 different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter 5311 to select a select using 5311 different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an actual value for this select using 5312 register 40008 Actual 4 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an actual value for this select using 5313 register 40009 Actual 5 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an actual value for this select using 5314 register 40010 Actual 6 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an actual value for this select using 5315 register 40011 Actual 7 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an actual value for this select using 5316 register 40012 Actual 8 By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an actual value for this select using 5317 register 40031 Control word LSW R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 Control word MSW R W Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 z 1 See parameter 0302 E 12 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 Supported only if 5305 1 See paramet
112. 1 and DI2 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DH DI2 Function i 0 0 Noconstantspeed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 offi Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 e Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 8l See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DIA e See above DI1 2 for code 10 DI4 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 for code 7 18 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value Group Parameter Name and Description CONSTANT CONST SPEED SEL 1201 Default 9 SPEEDS Continued Range 14 to 19 Continued DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DIS e Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated Con br p3 Function To 0 0 Noconstant speed 3 o o Constant speed 1 1202 o 1 o Constant sp
113. 10 Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail 11 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s 12 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end 13 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 0 3 Ib ft 14 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw Figure 4 3 MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 5 4 5 5 Wiring IP21 UL Type 1 Enclosure with Conduit Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied Install conduit gland box Connect conduit runs to box Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs Strip wires Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques Figure 4 4 Tightening Torque nogm om Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power Terminal Considerations R6 frame size 8 Route the control cable through the conduit must be separate from input power and motor conduit runs 9 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail 10 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive
114. 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 DI4 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 DI5 Constant speed 1 1202 18 Dl6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default operation 21 ROIB H Ready 19connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DI4 23 RO2ZA xj Default operation If both are active or inactive the 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 speed reference is unchanged 2 ROS EN Eu eue The existing speed reference is STHOSE Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 stored during stop or power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AOT Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current T AI 0 10V Constant speed selection DI5 Relay output 1 Ready Q gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Run enable DI6 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 JU HC o AI 0 10V v 107 AI2 0 4 20 mA 5 8 Control Wiring MN796 ACB530 5 4 5 Hand Auto Operating Mode This operating mode provides an l O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902
115. 3 NOT SEL No response FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 I O COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 I O COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost Med WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value FAULT COMM FAULT TIME 3019 FUNCTIONS Continued Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 WIRING FAULT 3023 CB TEMP FAULT 3024 AUTOMATIC NUMBER OF TRIALS RESET TRIAL TIME 3102 DELAY TIME 3103 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 3 0 s Range 0 0 600 0 s Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 Sets a fault level for analog input 1 e See 3001 A
116. 3 s s 39 22 se 17 41 5o 25 50 60 30 500 500 39 e se 20 31 sr 30 42 so 40 50 60 so so0 soo 5o Ls s s 2o sr er 43 42 so 57 so 0 70 500 so 70 4 s e 1 7308 17 se nz 23 120 1424 30 soo soo 30 5 se 71 Jas 30 efine MN796 ACB530 Group USER LOAD CURVE Continued Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value USER LOAD C FUNC 8702 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 LOAD FREQ 1 3704 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3705 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD FREQ 2 3707 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 3708 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD FREQ 3 3710 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 3711 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD FREQ 4 3713 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 1 FAULT Range 1 2 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Action wanted during load supervision Default 20 s Range 10 400s Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm Default 5 Hz Range 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2
117. 3 2 Diagnostics MN796 ACB530 8 18 8 18 8 18 8 18 8 18 8 19 8 19 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 20 8 21 8 21 8 21 8 21 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 22 8 23 8 23 8 23 8 23 8 23 8 23 8 23 8 24 8 26 8 26 8 26 8 27 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 29 8 29 8 30 8 30 8 34 Brake components erie die boa a A da wee a cea ae n 8 31 8 34 1 Availability PE a tieeie aed ne eee euler eee acoder a sun alate Pe eee ede ee 8 31 8 34 2 Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 0 0 eee eee 8 31 8 34 3 Installing and wiring resistors kent 8 34 8 34 4 Mandatory circuit protection 0 2 0 ee ie ne a E E EE aE D 8 34 8 34 5 Parameter Set p a d rae bt end i A duc a at a i Sa 8 34 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 11 Fault Tracing iode dee ROI RU tesa aed RES A A CR ERU 9 1 cam A A RA dap aid wong dd Gac 9 1 O72 Safely RC ur A oe A A AA ci E 9 1 9 3 Diagnostic displays coem 6 cir a a Poked Ghee eed wees 9 1 9 9 1 Red Faults e Erben d A Den A d eae ata 9 1 9 3 2 Flashing green Alarms oococcoocccco lh hh hh 9 1 9 4 Alarm and Fault Indications i een a Rob eR RE T gk Sard w pou EAE pee 9 1 9 5 How to Reset ios2liceR RR DR I ROOIITAT4E RR Yea prep A REG 9 2 9 5 1 Fault Resetting i a rupem a 9 2 9 5 2 Correcting ARMS ii e es 9 2 9 6 Fault History 2e oi de ohne ii exe a Due o il a 9 4 9 7 BiETo gozii e PPM 9 4 9 72 Cor
118. 3 Performing a Guided Start Up sarase cpa nani a pae eee nne 8 2 Controlling the Drive through the I O Interface llle II 8 2 1 Preliminary Settlngs ip Re ek emis ERR KORUR VR a RS a ae E 8 2 2 Starting and Controlling the Speed of the Motor lille eee 8 2 3 Changing the Direction of the Motor Rotation 0 0 0 8 2 4 Stopping tlie MOLDE iuc ot RR auda 25 e YR DONE A Rid eU dn be Bagel eee 8 3 Performing Motor Model Calc 22er ii al OR Rd ate a 8 3 1 Motor Model Calis tears arn aueh eae triada E a Roe Re 8 4 Program features 8 4 1 Start up assistant ores nc xp Ec es sce Re base ange ace e RR 8 5 Local control vs external control cerere tiran esee ran 8 5 1 Local control 2 2 2suol ic m Rz A P4 acea Ra 3 he ARR ia PG E ER EDU a 8 5 2 External CONO vacia eun Rod one eid a eic e ad Boning bec le RO die d 8 5 3 Settings 8 5 4 DIagBlOStlCS s tii aoe tee A A A A aed We eet Rasa bos 8 5 6 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 0oocooccocoo eee 8 6 Reference types and processing ooooooocccronr eee rne 8 6 1 Settings 8 7 Programmable analog inputs ooococcoco lll hae 8 7 1 Settings 8 7 2 DIagnostl6S sr Ls dw iu eee e e ames c Kw E Rd ae Ree es 8 8 Programmable analog Output iaa emnt dee E sr EUER RR DIR adas Oe A ba 8 8 1 Settings 8 8 2 DiagnostlCS visir A eR p ue OE AIR RURVR a SOR UR GR RR UR DR Uc 8 9 Programmable digital Inp ts err Rr RR RR OER REE ERA Rer eae ee eee
119. 30 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE Disables controller ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off e Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency Default 1 ENABLE TIME Range 0 2 DISABLE Disables controller ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on e If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit e When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip e The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan Default 0 0 Hz Range 500 0 to 500 0
120. 306 EFB OK MESSAGESS value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do e Check the RS 232 ElA 485 interface connection MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 8 9 9 Maintenance 9 9 1 Maintenance Intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by Baldor Table 9 2 Maintenance Interval Instruction Maintenance _ Interval instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See Internal enclosure fan replacement replacement IP54 UL type 12 drives Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming Capacitor replacement Every nine years See Replacement frame sizes R5 and R6 Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Battery Control Panel Consult your local Baldor District Office for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to http www baldor com 9 9 2 Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more ofte
121. 3413 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range OUTPUT2 MAX 3414 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range SIGNAL3 PARAM 3415 Default 105 Parameter 0105 TORQUE Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 SIGNALS MIN 3416 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range B 10 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 DISPLAY Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 SIGNAL1 MIN 3402 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range SIGNAL1 MAX 3403 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Parameter Number Group Selection Value PANEL SIGNAL3 MAX 3417 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 DISPLAY Range Continued OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Default 9 DIRECT 3418 Range 0 9 OUTPUTS UNIT 3419 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range 0 127 OUTPUTS MIN 3420 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range OUTPUTS MAX 3421 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range MOTOR TEMP SENSOR TYPE 3501 Default 0 NONE MEAS Range 0 6 INPUT SELECTION 3502 Default 1 Al1 Range 1 8 ALARM LIMIT 3503 Default 110 C 1500 onm 0 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501 4 0 to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 Parameter Name and Description User Setting FAULT LIMIT 3504 Default 130 C 4000 ohm 0 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501
122. 5 345 V U1 yyyy 4 230 690 V P 9905 U1 yyyy 6 288 862 V Output voltage Output frequency Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e The ACB530 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power mains voltage NOTE MOTOR RATED VOLT 9905 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Parameter Descriptions 7 1 Parameter Number Selection Value START UP MOTOR RATED AMPS DATA 9906 Continued Group MOTOR RATED FREQ 9907 MOTOR RATED SPEED 9908 MOTOR RATED HP 9909 CALC MOTOR MODEL 9910 7 2 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 1 0 Range 0 2 4 2 0 where is drive current Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate NOTE MOTOR RATED AMPS 9906 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 01 50 0 Hz U1 60 0 Hz Range 10 0 500 0 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Defines the nominal motor frequency e Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR RATED FREQ e Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Rated Freq NOTE MOTOR RATED FREQ 9907 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default Dependent Upon Size Range 50 30 000 RPM Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate NOTE
123. 6 Nt MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 29 cmd cmd 1 o Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function E o _ Driverunsatthejoggingspeed OOS o o Drwedecelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp ofthe jogging function o o omesso CS 0 Dre accelerates to he jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function E o pre runs atte jogging speed 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference o o Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp o o Drive is stopped active acceleration ramp 1 0 Dre decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function E o DWemmsatepgongsped OOS o o Drwedecelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp ofthe jogging function X state can be either 1 or 0 Note The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on Note The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds Note The jogging uses ramp stop even if parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION selection is COAST Note The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging ie linear ramp Jogging function uses constant speed 7 as jogging speed and acceler
124. 6 ACB530 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting Parameter Number Selection Value LOAD PEAK TIME 1 6407 Default ANALYZER Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days Continued PEAK TIME 2 6408 Default Range Time hh mm ss CURRENT AT PEAK 6409 Default Range 0 0 6553 5 A UDC AT PEAK 6410 Default Range 0 65535 V FREQ AT PEAK 6411 Default Range 0 0 6553 5 Hz TIME OF RESET 1 6412 Default Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days TIME OF RESET 2 6413 Default Range Time hh mm ss AL1RANGEOTO 0 6414 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE10T020 6415 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE20TO30 6416 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE30TO40 6417 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE40TO5O0 6418 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE5OTOGO 6419 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE60TO70 6420 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE70TO80 6421 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGE80TO90 6422 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL1RANGEOOTO 6423 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGEOTO 0 6424 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE10TO20 6425 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE20TO30 6426 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE30T040 6427 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE40TO50 6428 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGESOTO60 6429 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE60TO70 6430 Default Range 0 0 100 09
125. 6 AL2RANGE70TO80 6431 Default Range 0 0 100 096 AL2RANGE80TOQ9O 6432 Default Range 0 0 100 096 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 15 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting Parameter Number Selection Value OPTIONS AL2RANGE9OTO 6433 Default Range 0 0 100 0 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting COMM PROT SEL 9802 Default O NOT SEL Range 0 1 4 B 16 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Chapter C CE Guidelines C 1 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distributi
126. 7 6 2 5 3 How to Adjust the Display Contrast EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press wr repeatedly until you get there MENU MJ N e To increase the contrast press ana and A 3 simultaneously e To decrease the contrast press Y keys and Y simultaneously 6 6 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 6 Parameter Mode In the Parameter mode you can e view and change parameter values e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 2 6 1 How to Select a Parameter and Change its Value Step Action 1 MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing Y if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu 2 Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys 4 Sand Y_2 and pressing 3 Select the appropriate parameter group with keys CAaand Cw 7 SEL Press N Select the appropriate parameter with keys A S and amp Y 7 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter EDIT Press 5 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys CAS and CY Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 6 SAVE Du e To save the new value press CANCEL e To cancel the new value and keep the original
127. 7 37 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value MOTOR IR COMP FREQ 2604 Default 80 CONTROL Range 0 100 Group Parameter Name and Description Continued Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is O V in of motor frequency U F RATIO 2605 Default 1 LINEAR Range 1 2 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point SWITCHING FREQ 2606 Default 4 kHz Range 1 2 4 8 12 kHz Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating Higher switching frequencies mean less noise e 12 kHz switching frequency is available in scalar control mode that is when parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE z 2 V F CONTROL e See the availability of switching frequencies for different drive types in the table below DN ETT ETT IE KH 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar control mode Frame sizes R1 R4 except ACB530 01 097A 4 in 380 480 V All types scalar control mode 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode SWITCH FREQ CTRL Default 1 ON 2607 Range 0 1 OFF The function is disabled ON The switching frequency is limited accor
128. 8 to 3276 7 The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 0 0 6553 5 The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 0 0 6553 5 The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 3276 8 to 3276 7 The motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 0000 FFFF hex The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range As par 0401 Fault code of the second last fault Read only Read Only Range As par 0401 Fault code of the third last fault Read only MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value START STOP EXT1 COMMANDS 1001 DIR Group MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 2 DI1 2 Range 0 10 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop
129. 909 Default 1 0 Ra Range 0 2 P a 3 0 Ppa CALC MOTOR MODEL Default O 9910 Range 0 1 MOTOR COSPHI 9915 Default O Range 0 0 97 SPEED amp DIR 0101 Read Only Range 30000 to 30000 RPM SPEED 0102 Read Only Range 0 to 30000 RPM OUTPUT FREQ 0103 Read Only Range 0 0 500 0 Hz CURRENT 0104 Read Only Range 0 0 2 0 TORQUE 0105 Read Only Range 200 0 to 200 096 POWER 0106 Read Only Range 2 0 P to 2 0 P a DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 Read Only Range 0 V4 tO 2 5 V4 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 Default Range 0 V4 to 2 0 V4 DRIVE TEMP 0110 Read Only Range 0 0 150 0 C EXTERNAL REF 1 0111 Read Only Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 1 Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description User Setting START EXTERNAL REF 2 0112 Read Only UP DATA Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque Continued CTRL LOCATION 0113 Read Only Range 0 2 RUN TIME R 0114 Read Only Range 0 9999 h KWH COUNTER 0115 Read Only Range 0 65535 kWh APPL BLK OUTPUT 0116 Read Only Range 0 0 100 096 0 0 600 096 for torque DI 1 3 STATUS 0118 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal DI 4 6 STATUS 0119 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal Al 1 0120 Read Only Range 0 0 100 096 Al 2 0121 Read Only Range 0 0 100 096 RO 1 3 STATUS 0122 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal AO 1
130. A MAXIMUM AO1 1505 Default 20 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting ll CONST SPEED 5 CONST SPEED 6 CONST SPEED 7 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 5 Parameter Number Selection Value ANALOG FILTER AO1 1506 Default 0 0 s OUTPUTS Range 0 0 10 0 s Continued AO2 CONTENT SEL 1507 Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT Range 99 178 AO2 CONTENT MIN 1508 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1507 Range AO2 CONTENT MAX 1509 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1507 Range MINIMUM AO2 1510 Default 0 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA MAXIMUM AO2 1511 Default 20 0mA Range 0 0 20 0mA FILTER AO2 1512 Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0s SYSTEM RUN ENABLE 1601 Default 0 NOT SEL CONTROLS Range 6 to 7 PARAMETER LOCK 1602 Default 1 OPEN Range 0 2 PASS CODE 1603 Default O Range 0 65535 FAULT RESET SEL 1604 Default O KEYPAD Range 6 k 8 LOCAL LOCK 1606 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 M 7 PARAM SAVE 1607 Default O DONE Range 0 1 START ENABLE 1 1608 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 da 7 START ENABLE 2 1609 Default O NOT SEL Range 6 Y 7 DISPLAY ALARMS 1610 Default O NO Range 0 1 LIMITS MINIMUM SPEED 2001 Default 0 RPM Range 30000 to 30000 RPM MAXIMUM SPEED 2002 Default 01 1500 RPM U1 1800 RPM Range 0 to 30000 RPM M
131. A 1 LOSS The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and EXIT 00 DETAIL corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing EA 90vO9 ee ALL Z To see the details of a fault select it with keys 4 and and press Y ES RANEE LOS 10 FAULT TI ME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TI ME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG To show the help text press Y Scroll the help text with keys and d pee rice and connections After reading the help press ms jan 6 2 10 Time and Date Mode In the Time and date mode you can show or hide the clock e change date and time display formats set the date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The assistant keypad contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive 6 12 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 10 1 How to Show or Hide the Clock Change Display Formats Set the Date and Time and Enable or Disable Clock Transitions due to Daylight Saving Changes B l t ANI Go to the Main menu by pressing Y pressing ES repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with keys a and y 2 and pressing EL To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu pre
132. ACB530 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default ready RO1A Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A RO1B Minimum 500mW 12V 10mA RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default running Relay Outputs RO2A Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A RO2B Minimum 500mW 12V 10mA RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default fault 1 RO3A Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A RO3B Minimum 500mW 12V 10mA 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30V Default values depend on the operating mode used Values specified are for the default operating mode See Application Operation Modes Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACB530 is powered down WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a
133. AX CURRENT 2003 Default 1 8 Range 0 1 8 4 OVERVOLT CTRL 2005 Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 UNDERVOLT CTRL 2006 Default 1 ENABLE TIME Range 0 2 MINIMUM FREQ 2007 Default 0 0 Hz Range 500 0 to 500 0 Hz MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 Default 60 0 62 0 Hz Range 0 0 E 500 A Hz MIN TORQUE 1 2015 Default 300 0 Range 600 0 to 0 0 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting B 6 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value START STOP MAX TORQUE 1 2017 Default 300 0 Range 0 0 to 600 0 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting START FUNCTION 2101 Default 8 RAMP Range 0 0 to 600 0 STOP FUNCTION 2102 Default 1 COAST Range 1 2 DC MAGN TIME 2103 Default 0 30 s Range 0 00 10 00 s DC HOLD CTL 2104 Default 0 NOT SEL Range 0 2 Default 5 RPM Range 0 360 RPM DC CURR REF 2106 Default 3096 Range 0 10096 DC BRAKE TIME 2107 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 250 0s START INHIBIT 2108 Default 0 OFF Range 0 1 EMERG STOP SEL 2109 Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 6 TORQ BOOST CURR Default 100 2110 Range 15 300 ZERO SPEED DELAY Default 0 0 s NOT SEL 2112 Range 0 0 s 0 1s 60 0s START DELAY 2113 Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 s 60 00 s ACCEL DECEL ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 2201 Default 5 DI5 Range 6 to 7 ACCELER TIME 1 2202 Default 5 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s DECELER TIME 1 2203 Default 5 0 s
134. AXIMUM Al2 j P 4018 i i Curent 0 2 nominal curent 1 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque PAIS Oli Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power 1 fe Ganaa Sourc min Source max Source signal ACT1 MAXIMUM 4019 Default 100 Range 1000 to 1000 Sets the maximum value for ACT1 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM ACT2 MINIMUM 4020 Default 0 Range 1000 to 1000 Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 7 58 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number PROCESS PID ACT2 MAXIMUM 4021 SET 1 Continued SLEEP SELECTION 4022 PID SLEEP LEVEL 4023 MN796 ACB530 Selection Value Parameter Name and Description Default 100 Range 1000 to 1000 Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e Activating the digital input activates the sleep function e De activating the digital input restores PID control DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 above INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL
135. Attach the ring lugs to the drive SAINZ MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 11 Figure 4 11 Crimp On Ring Lugs Table 4 5 kcmil Ring Lug Crimping Tool No of Crimps AWG L Buy mwone was 3 Lu we mo a E buoy acaso was 3 ko cccas res 1 Bum wowo wes gt isco i om e 22 isco dS mes Bumy _vatc asox mwas gt YA26 LABOX Mv29 3 2 CRE 0 iDri2 CCL VO 88 MT25 BE ME nlxlaxaini in 4 6 3 Screw On Terminal Lugs Use the following procedure to attach cables if screw on terminal lugs are supplied and the cable size is 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger 1 Attach the supplied screw on lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach screw on lugs to the drive Figure 4 12 Screw On Terminal Lugs 4 12 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 7 Input Power Connections WARNING Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive 4 7 1 Input Power Specifications Table 4 6 Input Power Mains Connection Specifications 208 220 230 240 VAC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 to 10 for ACB530 x1 xxxx 2 380 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 3 phase 15 to 10 for ACB530 x1 xxxx 4 500 525 575 600 VAC 3 phase 15 to 41096 for ACB530 U1 xxxx 6 Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100kA providing that the input power
136. BALDOR A MEMBER OF THE ABB GROUP User s manual ACB530 12 12 Installation amp Operating Manual MN796 ACB530 Any trademarks used in this manual are the property of their respective owners Important Be sure to check www baldor com for the latest software firmware and drivers for your VS1GV product Also you can download the latest version of this manual in Adobe Acrobat PDF format Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Tel Manual Introduction i2 ouo rk ae euch fn Ri aede x e eee rx e d ORAE caca 1 1 1 What This Chapter Contains i oen eer heh Pcr dale andes ko ak RR are rd 1 1 2 Applicable Firmware Versions ooococococcoooe e 11 8 Purpose of the Manual 2 31 52 ait x eR sort aud c der ra Gola ael Re Rude ud oe 1 12 Related Documents oer br ERE RR RR UR e I ADR ER eee 1 1 3 Categorization by Frame Size 0 0 2 nnn 1 2 Satety NOtiC8S cose ee br RE deca a OE Es 1 3 Use of Warnings aret rpm eme pk Rer ees nea RO aaa Saas aaa Rane a ERR ee 1 4 Safety Related to Installation and Maintenance 00 0 cee nee 1 41 Electrical Safety ic 8d iic ems a ce Y Ee tee Ran trus a een dias 142 GeneraliSafety i i don haa on ono E Rodas Oe a RAO de ER e Jn Rc JR ol 1 9 UNPackINO p c dl a a Hae e a tae ln baie il aa 1 6 INSPECTION xus ri A A E A ais a Sandee 1 7 Type Designation Label prb nrg aces rd 1 7 1 Serial Number Explanation omni ez xxx ee Ga ape nue RR RR ROREM e a a 1 8 S
137. CONTROL Range 0 1 FLUX BRAKING 2602 Default O OFF Range 0 1 IR COMP VOLT 2603 Default Size Dependent Range 0 0 100 0 V IR COMP FREQ 2604 Default 80 Range 0 100 U F RATIO 2605 Default 1 ere Range 1 SWITCHING FREQ 2606 Default 4 kHz Range 1 2 4 8 12 kHz SWITCH FREQ CTRL Default 1 2607 Range 0 zn SLIP COMP RATIO 2608 Default 096 Range 0 200 NOISE SMOOTHING 2609 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 DC STABILIZER 2619 Default 0 DISABLE Range 0 1 FAULT AI MIN FUNCTION 3001 Default O NOT SEL FUNCTIONS Range 0 3 PANEL COMM ERR 3002 Default 1 een Range 1 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3003 Default O NOT SEL Range d to 6 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 3004 Default O NOT SEL Range E to 6 MOT THERM PROT 3005 Default 1 TS Range 1 Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting B 8 Parameter Tables MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value FAULT MOT THERM TIME 3006 Default 500 s FUNCTIONS Range 256 9999 s Continued MOT LOAD CURVE 3007 Default 100 Range 50 150 ZERO SPEED LOAD 3008 Default 7096 Range 25 15096 BREAK POINT FREQ Default 35 Hz 3009 Range 1 250 Hz STALL FUNCTION 3010 Default O NOT SEL Range 0 2 STALL FREQUENCY 3011 Default 20 0 Hz Range 0 5 50 0 Hz STALL TIME 3012 Default 20 s Range 10 400s EARTH FAULT 3017 Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 COMM FAULT FUNC Default O NOT SEL
138. DY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE 1 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT No fault OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive 1 OFF3 ACTIVE ON 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT active ALARM 1 1 1 k NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_REF OPERATION INHIBITED OFF3 inactive SWC_ON_INHIB Alarm No alarm OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_RUN OPERATION ENABLED OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3_STA SWITCH ON INHIBIT not active AT_SETPOINT REMOTE ll Ba E a ia E 16 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 10 ABOVE LIMIT Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM UN EXTCTRLLOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected O External control location EXT1 selected il EXT RUN External Run enable signal received ENABLE 307 No exte
139. Disconnecting the internal EMC filter The arive is properly grounded S O Oo e The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage Oooo The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified EE The input power mains fuses are installed Tre motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified LT Tre motor cable is routed away from other cables OZ O NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor able LT rre control connections are connected and tightened as speed EE NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive m NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive 4 20 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 Chapter 5 Control Wiring 5 1 Control Connection Specifications 5 1 1 What this chapter contains This chapter describes how to connect control signals such as run and stop commands analog references digital outputs etc to the ACB530 Typically these signals would connect the ACB530 to supervisory control equipment such as a PLC or to hand operators such as push buttons selector switches and indicator lights Table 5 1 Control Connection Specification Analog Inputs and Outputs See section Control Terminals table Digital Inputs Digita input impedance
140. E 24 E 14 1 Start Stop Direction Control sirist ii e de E Peale eee E 24 E 14 2 Input Reference Select 5 ia eaten ete bd A c UR A UR RR EUR D RC n E 24 E 14 3 System CONTO urs cages oh ee ore Re e Y agere d wol e dee RU ai aS E 24 E 14 4 Relay Output Control 22 4 iyd eene drei wt A aude Rob EUROS Rr ee E 25 E 14 5 Analog Output Control 2252 corra RE Ru a a PI a REX ERE E 25 E 14 6 PID Control Setpoint Source iier pu m kam a aa cma eds E 25 E 14 7 Communication Fault a de bere A A RR ORE EE E 26 E 15 Feedback from the Drive FBA ooocccccccccococ lh E 26 EST6 DIAgnOStIOsS 0 RI O A A di Seed E 26 E 16 1 Fault Handling is d o ime o ie e eR Rn dns E 26 E 16 2 Serial Communications Diagnostics s esencan ei aa e nee E 27 E 17 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data ooocccocccconoorr nn E 28 cupAEeSUSI UAE TUM E 28 E172 Control Word 20000 dt Ee a ee pb ee eel ea E Pd E 28 E dA7 3 Status WOtId oidos salar rado sape qe ids pe E EE E 29 E174 Status Word sic ccs dg ch pe e bose ne tere eereeee ce Bs p PEertRSIWRDOTURRESePR S E 30 E 1 5 Reference SCalinG ix a oe ned oe a a EE doa E 31 E 1 6 Actual Valls SCalMO viii ra Et rds Re E 32 viii MN796 ACB530 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Manual Introduction 1 1 1 What This Chapter Contains This chapter contains introductory information related to the ACB530 variable frequency drive This drive provides functionality that can be used to control many variable speed
141. ED MWH 0175 DATA Read Only Range 0 65535 MWh Continued Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy econsumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from O Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time e See Group ENERGY SAVING SAVED AMOUNT 1 0176 Read Only Range 0 0 999 9 Energy saved in local currency remainder when the total saved energy is divided by 1000 Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy econsumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the valu
142. ENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total e Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 21 The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACB530 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Control Word CW Fieldbus o Process l O References cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values 7 Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt gt Acyclic E 11 2 Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug
143. IME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present e Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 through R4 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 4 SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct e A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor e Supply disturbances DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains 7 Al LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for Ali FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS paramete
144. IO RI Ra Residual current device U Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage F Radio frequency interference Remote terminal unit L Safety integrity level See Appendix Safe torque off STO Safe torque off See Appendix Safe torque off STO TN system Type of supply system that provides a direct connection to ground earth MN796 ACB530 Introduction 1 5 1 10 Operation Principle and Hardware Description 1 10 1 Operation Principle The ACB530 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor The brake chopper connects the external brake resistor to the intermediate DC circuit when the voltage in the circuit exceeds its maximum limit Rectifier Capacitor Inverter U1 bank U2 AC supply V1 AC motor Brake chopper K A I l BRK BRK Common DC terminals 1 6 Introduction MN796 ACB530 Chapter 2 General Information and Ratings 2 1 Type Designation Use the following chart to interpret the type designation found on both the type designation and the serial number label Figure 2 1 ACB530
145. ISPLAY ALARMS 1610 LIMITS MINIMUM SPEED 2001 MAXIMUM SPEED 2002 MAX CURRENT 2003 7 28 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 0 NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal e f the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI1 above COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal e See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI1 INV above Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality NOTE START ENABLE 2 1609 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 0 NO Range 0 1 NO The above alarms are suppressed
146. L Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to PL 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 values 1507 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to PL 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 values Ener sme constatar 02 E 14 6 PID Control setpoint source Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 AH 8 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 dO COMM ARI 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 25 E 14 7 Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED E 15 Feedback from the Drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data Drive Parameter Protocol Reference 0102 SPEED 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE mo eow SSS mo DO BUS VOLTAGE oo mo OUTPUT VOLTAGE xor FB cvm woRor oro sro xor rBcMDWoRDII btzREy 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit O DIS b E 16 Diagnostics E 16 1 Fault handling The ACB530 provides fault information as follows The control panel display shows a fault code and
147. LTAGE Default 0 DISABLE 3106 Range 0 1 DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off AR AI MIN 3107 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment AR EXTERNAL FLT 3108 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 7 44 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value SUPERVISION SUPERV 1 PARAM 3201 Group 100 101 178 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 3202 SU
148. M 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 e 0 1 500 RPM 100 50 Hz 1 Assumes that the actual value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assumes that the actual value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz E 6 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 E 8 Diagnostics EFB E 8 1 Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics The three most recent ACB530 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 E 8 2 Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are e loose connections e incorrect wiring including swapped wires e bad grounding e duplicate station numbers e incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 E 8 3 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive e 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive e 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is rece
149. MOTOR RATED RPM 9908 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 1 0 P q Range 0 2 P 3 0 P Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate NOTE MOTOR RATED HP 9909 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default O Range 0 1 NO The CALC MOTOR MODEL process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 OPEN VECTOR Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 2 V F CONTROL and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed e Parameter 9904 2 V F CONTROL and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed YES Enables the CALC MOTOR MODEL during which the motor is rotating at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 This parameter controls a self calibration process called the CALC MOTOR MODEL During this process the drive operates the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal cal
150. Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 23 3 1 Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 23 4 External fault External faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal 8 23 4 1 Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 8 23 5 Stall protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction 8 23 5 1 Settings Parameters 3010 STALL FUNCTION 3011 STALL FREQUENCY and 3012 STALL TIME 8 23 6 Motor thermal protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C 86 F when power is applied to the drive Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted if the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F Motor 4 load i 100 Output current relative to nominal motor current w T Break point t Motor load curve Temp 4 P 3007 100 5 rise
151. ONST SPEED 1 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down Hz changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed S value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE SAVE e To accept the new value press Y If the new value is the default value the ns gt GANED iss parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters CANCEL 1 T SPEED 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLI C MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT To cancel the new value and keep the original press Y MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 11 6 2 9 Fault Logger Mode In the Fault logger mode you can e view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 2 9 1 How to View Faults RELIER REL ay Go to the Main menu by pressing NO if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXI T T NTER Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with keys LOC UFAULT LOGGER 4 and and pressing wi The display shows the fault log starting with the a 19 03 05 13 04 57 NDERVO latest fault O 6
152. OT SELECTED 101 178 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 3208 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Range SUPERV 3 LIM HI 3209 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3207 Range INFORMATION FIRMWARE 3301 Default Firmware version Range 0000 FFFF hex LOADING PACKAGE 3302 Default Type dependent Range 0000 FFFF hex TEST DATE 3303 Default Range yy ww DRIVE RATING 3304 Default Type dependent Range Group Parameter Name and Description User Setting PARAMETER TABLE 3305 Default Type dependent Range 0000 FFFF hex Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive PANEL SIGNAL1 PARAM 3401 Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Default 9 DIRECT 3404 Range 0 9 OUTPUT1 UNIT 3405 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range 0 127 OUTPUT 1 MIN 3406 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range OUTPUT1 MAX 3407 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range SIGNAL2 PARAM 3408 Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 SIGNAL2 MIN 3409 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range SIGNAL2 MAX 3410 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Default 9 DIRECT 3411 Range 0 9 OUTPUT UNIT 3412 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range 0 127 OUTPUT2 MIN
153. OUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy econsumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553 5 the counter does not roll over Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time CO2 conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR e See Group ENERGY SAVING FB ACTUAL FB CMD WORD 1 0301 Read Only Group Parameter Name and Description SIGNALS Range Command Word 1 WORD 1 WORD 2 The fieldbus command is the principal o soe FBLOCAL CIL E 3 ioca fsrman osast means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states e To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 RAMP IN O LINK ON TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a duci E FB CMD WORD 2 0302 Read Only Range Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 e See parameter 0301 FB STS WORD
154. Output 6 MN796 ACB530 E 9 2 2 1xxxx Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs e bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose e discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Internal Location All ABB DRV Profiles 5305 0 OR 2 Modbus Reference 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB ex Jo 1 Active Low MN796 ACB530 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA DCU PROFILE 5305 1 READY ENABLED STARTED RUNNING ZERO SPEED ACCELERATE DECELERATE AT SETPOINT LIMIT SUPERVISION REV REF REV ACT PANEL LOCAL EXT2 ACT FAULT ALARM FIELDBUS LOCAL Fieldbus Communications E 11 For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACB530 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs E 9 2 3 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus Reference ACB530 All Profiles Remarks 30001 Alt This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 AI2 This regi
155. PEED AUTOTUNE RUN 2305 Default O OFF CONTROL Range 0 1 Continued Group Parameter Name and Description OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller Procedure Note The motor load must be connected e Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive e Accelerates the motor e Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation e Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values e Resets 2305 to OFF CRITICAL CRIT SPEED SEL 2501 Default O OFF SPEEDS Range 0 1 OFF Disables the critical speeds function ON Enables the critical speeds function Sets the critical speeds function on or off foutput The critical speed function avoids specific A speed ranges Example To avoid speeds at which a fan Sok bolas aaa system vibrates badly IG cha gaa e Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 18 e Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 e Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz gt free Hz e Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz fiL fiH AL AH e Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz 18 23 46 52 e Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2502 De
156. PERV 1 LIM HI 3203 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected Selects parameter 0101 0178 Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group OPERATING DATA e f the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized e The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO lt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO lt H I Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO HI Mtn y p Note CaselO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis The lowest limit HI 3203 is active initially and remains active until the Value of supervised parameter 4
157. PT100 and PTC DI1 DI6 Thermistor and PTC Defines the input used for the temperature sensor Default 110 C 1500 ohm 0 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501 4 0 to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 De activated Activated Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input Default 130 C 4000 ohm 0 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501 4 0 to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 De activated Activated Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input Parameter Descriptions 7 51 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value USER LOAD USER LOAD C MODE CURVE 3701 Group 7 52 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default O NOT SEL Range 0 3 NOT SEL Supervision is not active UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve Motor torque 96 S
158. Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default READ ONLY Range IDLE Adapter not configured EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error e The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 5128 OFF LINE Adapter is off line ON LINE Adapter is on line RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset Contains the status of the adapter module Default READ ONLY Range Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Default READ ONLY Range Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parameter 5132 Default 1 Range 1 247 Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Default 9 6 kbits s Range 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s Default 0 8 NONE 1 Range 0 3 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even
159. REET HAYWARD CA 94545 PHONE 510 785 9900 FAX 510 785 9910 COLORADO DENVER 3855 FOREST STREET DENVER CO 80207 PHONE 303 623 0127 FAX 303 595 3772 CONNECTICUT WALLINGFORD 65 SOUTH TURNPIKE ROAD WALLINGFORD CT 06492 PHONE 203 269 1354 FAX 203 269 5485 FLORIDA TAMPA PUERTO RICO VIRGIN ISLANDS 3906 EAST 11TH AVENUE TAMPA FL 33605 PHONE 813 248 5078 FAX 813 241 9514 GEORGIA ATLANTA 62 TECHNOLOGY DRIVE ALPHARETTA GA 30005 PHONE 770 772 7000 FAX 770 772 7200 ILLINOIS CHICAGO 340 REMINGTON BLVD BOLINGBROOK IL 60440 PHONE 630 296 1400 FAX 630 226 9420 INDIANA INDIANAPOLIS 5525 W MINNESOTA STREET INDIANAPOLIS IN 46241 PHONE 317 246 5100 FAX 317 246 5110 Baldor Sales Offices IOWA DES MOINES 1943 HULL AVENUE DES MOINES IA 50313 PHONE 515 263 6929 FAX 515 263 6515 MARYLAND BALTIMORE 6660 SANTA BARBARA RD SUITES 22 24 ELKRIDGE MD 21075 PHONE 410 579 2135 FAX 410 579 2677 MASSACHUSETTS BOSTON 6 PULLMAN STREET WORCESTER MA 01606 PHONE 508 854 0708 FAX 508 854 0291 MICHIGAN DETROIT 5993 PROGRESS DRIVE STERLING HEIGHTS MI 48312 PHONE 586 978 9800 FAX 586 978 9969 MINNESOTA MINNEAPOLIS 13098 GEORGE WEBER DR SUITE 400 ROGERS MN 55374 PHONE 763 428 3633 FAX 763 428 4551 MISSOURI ST LOUIS 13678 LAKEFRONT DRIVE EARTH CITY MO 63045 PHONE 314 373 3032 FAX 314 373 3038 KANSAS CITY 1501 BEDFORD AVENUE NORTH KANSAS CITY MO 64116 PHONE 816 587 0272
160. RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 OUTPUTS Continued Continued RELAY OUTPUT 2 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1403 RO 1 ON DELAY 1404 RO 1 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 2 ON DELAY 1406 RO 2 OFF DELAY 1407 RO 3 ON DELAY 1408 MN796 ACB530 Selection Value Parameter Name and Description Default 1 Range 0 36 46 47 52 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary Roe Ros Ro4 Ros Ro2 Rot 90 0009 x t uv 1 pt 0003 1 1 1 o 2 0000 150 t 3 oot 2 1 o o 4 ooo 1 o t 5 62 2 lo fotooo es nmm o o fo o o jo 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 7 2 3 4 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when the jogging function is active Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means Default 2 Range 0 36 46 47 52 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Default 3 Range 0 36 46 47 52 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT
161. RK BRK Brake resistor Brake options R3 RA UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the Internal EMC Filter MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 9 The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 Figure 4 10 R5 and R6 Power and Ground Terminal Layout R5 E A Tg A i PE GND GND Power input U1 V1 W1 n X0011 Power output to motor U2 V2 W2 R6 1 f z od j pu TAMEN CAN UN l Optional braking ood Fiter Connection 1 4 Frame Terminal iia size labels Brake options nooo fI R5 R6 UDC UDC e Braking unit Chopper and resistor WARNING To avoid danger or damage to the drive on IT systems and corner grounded TN systems see section Disconnecting the Internal EMC Filter Power input Power output to motor
162. RP RERO RR evens A uie Rx de RE RUE eee 6 1 6 1 1 About Keypads uui donatae se diode a ako o X eR denied Soak Done ric 6 1 6 2 Assistant Keypad s ouis x asi dre e esos neat xod sore odere ra cx e Se uS e o ees Ru eee 6 1 6 2 1 About Keypads wi ive cs ened dee A pde eA GE er XGA RE e EEUU RE POR 6 1 6 2 2 OVCIVICW A ere Geeta E eed eae ne aoe 6 2 6 2 3 Status ING sc acer ker Gees RE eee RETO OER PRE OEE COTE eee EEE eee eed 6 3 6 2 4 Operation A de eG ae wee KR RR Aa 6 3 6 2 5 Output Mde ca peti A Se cele DUNT eee Gee AS RIS 6 5 6 2 6 Parameter Mode eise pex Rana e EGORA ERR ROC epee AURA AUR ad RUE UR T Ross wea 6 7 6 2 Assistants MOQOG isa vais tte daos a dede idus ak ee RR e Ue a en d pud 6 9 6 2 8 Changed Parameters Mode icol rude ee a aom ge Ru RU a E Roa 6 11 6 2 9 Fault Logger Mode o 2 pone Ee ie doa e E RO RE Ro E ke ee rds 6 12 6 2 10 Time and Date Mode celo ec eee ee di ERE X ee epos 6 12 6 2 11 Parameter Backup Mode ei a RR REE a 6 14 6 2 12 VO Settings MOde cete e A quU RI AA qu O 6 17 Chapter 7 Parameter Descriptions f Parameters sss boob a amr ai e ERE RR FACES Rad E 7 1 MN796 ACB530 Chapter 8 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 4 Starting Up the DIVE ne conum uo aes POUR ie euet e p d HR ERU NC CR dene n fun 8 1 1 Starting up the Drive without a Keypad lt s ssas 0 0 eee eh 8 1 2 Performing a Man al Start up i c nce a cece ohne rr rr RARE ah oe eee re ER 8 1
163. SP FORM 9 DIRECT SIGNAL1 MAX 3403 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range P3406 Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 47 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PANEL OUTPUT1 DSP FORM DISPLAY 3404 Continued Group OUTPUT 1 UNIT 3405 OUTPUT 1 MIN 3406 OUTPUT1 MAX 3407 7 48 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 9 DIRECT Range 0 9 Defines the decimal point location Enter the number of digits desired vue to the right of the decimal point See the table for an example using pis pi 3 14159 Signed 0 65535 Unsigned Decimal point location and units as for the source signal BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are identical to the source signal See Group OPERATING DATA parameter listing in section Complete parameter list for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range 0 127 Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not ef
164. STATUS AT FLT 0409 DI 1 3 AT FLT 0410 DI 4 6 AT FLT 0411 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 0413 7 10 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Read Only Range Fault codes panel displays as text Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display Read Only Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days The day on which the last fault occurred Either as A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set Read Only Range Time hh mm ss The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the Basic Control Panel The time since power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days reported in 0402 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred Read Only Range 3276
165. Site It is important to ensure that the drive s environment and operating conditions comply with the drive specifications The area behind the drive must be kept clear of all control and power wiring Power connections may create electromagnetic fields that may interfere with control wiring or components when run in close proximity to the drive Read the recommendations in the following sections before continuing with the drive installation 3 1 4 Location Instructions Before deciding on an installation site consider the following guidelines Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles Do not expose the drive to a corrosive atmosphere Protect the drive from moisture and direct sunlight Verify that the drive location will meet the environmental conditions specified in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 ACB530 Ambient Environment Requirements Storage and Transportation i in the 0 1000m 0 3300ft 1000 2000m 3300 6600ft if P and derated 196 every 100m above 1000m 300ft above 3300ft Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed e Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if P and derated to 90 Ambient Temperature e Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if 40 70 C 40 158 F P and 4 derated to 80 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if P and derated to 65 to 50 for 8001 R4 frame sizes that is for ACB530 U1 032A 6 ACB530 U1 062A 6 Relative Humidity 5 9596 non condensi
166. Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals PID CONTROL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules PID control Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals 8 4 1 3 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 OPERATING MODE the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Table 8 2 Tasks and Relevant Drive Parameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 9910 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are not in the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed 1103 reference If AM is used Setting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202 2203 times MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 9 Speed control EXT2 PID control Start Stop control Selecting the source for the speed reference If AM is
167. T T t f Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz ji O Braking torque Flux braking n eo 100 D 7 5 kW 80 2 2 kw 0 37 kw 60 40 20 0 f Hz AAA No Flux braking f Hz MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 17 The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during the Flux braking Therefore Flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of Flux braking are e The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking e The cooling of the motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor 8 16 1 Settings Parameter 2602 FLUX BRAKING 8 17 Flux optimization Flux optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 1 to 10 depending on the load torque and speed 8 17 1 Settings Parameter 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE 8 18 Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and the ramp shape Switching A Linear between the two ramps can be controlled through a i i digital input or fie
168. TOR MODEL CALC SELECTION ON Press S to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero speed 8 1 2 4 Direction of the motor Rotation O Check the direction of the motor rotation e f the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing Ej e Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key e Press C to start the motor e Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD forward or REV reverse e PressC to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation SA Sf M N Z M e Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the Al 9 NO j opposite From 0 NO to 1 YES or vice versa SI ES gt A forward reverse e Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as direction direction described above REM UPAR EDIT 9914 PHASE INVERSION 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 8 1 2 5 Speed Limits and Acceleration Deceleration Times O Set the minimum speed parameter 2001 REM PAR EDIT 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 1 CANCEL 00 00 O Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 REM PAR EDIT 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED rpm 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE O Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 REM OPAR EDIT NOTE Acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 must also be set if two 22
169. The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter 1 regarding safety e ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death e Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation e Ifthe drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting the input power 4 2 Checking the insulation of the assembly 4 2 1 Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which reduce the testing voltage automatically 4 3 Planning the electrical installation 4 3 1 What this section contains This section contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations Baldor does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by Baldor are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover
170. U108A8 4 B055 AC Standard Drive 530 product series Construction region specific U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and UL compliance Output current rating e g 08A8 8 8 A see section Ratings for details Voltage Rating 2 208 240 V AC 4 380 480 V AC 6 500 600 V AC Options Examples of options B055 IP54 UL type 12 no specification IP21 UL type 1 UL type 12 is not available for type ACB530 01 290A 4 Note The ACB530 is provided in a UL type 1 enclosure as standard If the B055 appended to the end of the catalog a UL type 12 drive will be provided 1 The ACB530 is compatible with keypads that have the following revisions Keypad Type Type code Keypad Revision Keypad Firmware Assistant Keypad ACB CP BA 2 04 or later 2 1 1 Serial Number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labls is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture Y Y Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 etc XXXXX Integer starting every week from 00001 MN796 ACB530 General Information and Ratings 2 1 2 1 1 Ratings and Frame Size The tables below lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entr
171. UE 2 0159 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 SAVED KWH 0174 Read Only Range 0 0 999 9 kWh SAVED MWH 0175 Read Only Range 0 65535 MWh SAVED AMOUNT 1 0176 Read Only Range 0 0 999 9 SAVED AMOUNT 2 0177 Read Only Range 0 65535 Read Only Range 0 0 6553 5 tn FB ACTUAL FB CMD WORD 1 0301 Read Only SIGNALS Range FB CMD WORD 2 0302 Read Only Range FB STS WORD 1 0303 Read Only Range FB STS WORD 2 0304 Read Only Range FAULT WORD 1 0305 Read Only Range FAULT WORD 2 0306 Read Only Range FAULT WORD 3 0307 Read Only Range ALARM WORD 1 0308 Read Only Range ALARM WORD 2 0309 Read Only Range FAULT LAST FAULT 0401 Read Only HISTORY Range Fault codes panel displays as text FAULT TIME 1 0402 Read Only Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days FAULT TIME 2 0403 Read Only Range Time hh mm ss MN796 ACB530 Parameter Tables B 3 SAVED CO2 0178 Parameter Number Selection Value FAULT SPEED AT FLT 0404 Read Only HISTORY Range 32768 to 32767 Continued FREQ AT FLT 0405 Read Only Range 3276 8 to 3276 7 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0406 Read Only Range 0 0 6553 5 CURRENT AT FLT 0407 Read Only Range 0 0 6553 5 TORQUE AT FLT 0408 Read Only Range 3276 8 to 3276 7 STATUS AT FLT 0409 Read Only Range 0000 FFFF hex DI 1 3 AT FLT 0410 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal DI 4 6 AT FLT 0411 Read Only Range 000 111
172. UT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp function generator input to zero RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM OPERATING Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL S E REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled ABB DRV e Control word z 0 or reference z 0 Retain last Control word FULL and reference e Control word 0 and reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference decceleration acceleration ramp are locked EXT2 SELECT Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM EXT1 SELECT 0 Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM 12 15 Not in use DCU Profile The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile ADCU profile Control word parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Value Command Reqg Information STOP 1 Stops according to either the stop mode parameter 2102 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 START 1 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a no op stop command REVERSE 3 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference defines direction dud Forward direction 0 1 Local Mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals control and the drive RESET gt 1 External Mode moves to fieldbus local control mode RUN DISABLE Reset Edge sensitive no op RAMP IN ZERO
173. X Registers e 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACB530 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections e DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment e ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation E 9 2 Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACB530 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to eac
174. able Do not mix relay controlled signals using more than 30V and other control signals in the same cable Run relay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage 48V Relay controlled signals using less than 48V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Note Never mix 24VDC and 115 230VAC signals in the same cable 5 2 1 1 Analog Cables Recommendations for analog signal runs Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals 5 2 1 2 Digital Cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 1 5 2 1 3 Keypad Cable If the keypad is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch Ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable 5 2 2 Drive s Control Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Table 5 2 Control Tightening Torque 1 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires th
175. abled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables 4 4 3 Grounding and Routing 4 4 3 1 Motor Cable Shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable e Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive e Armored cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables e Shielded cable For shielded cable details see section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance 4 4 3 2 Grounding See section Ground Connections For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see section Effective motor cable shields 4 2 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 4 3 3 Corner Grounded TN Systems WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Corner grounded TN
176. ad with an LCD display language selection for the display start up assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the keypad memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 1 6 2 2 Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the assistant keypad Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LED Descriptions LCD display Divided into three main areas a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display 3 Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function 4 Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Increments a value if a parameter is selected e Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down e Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in t
177. aking torque the larger of 15096 of heavy duty or 11096 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed RMAX If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed RMAX The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Braking ON Time Braking OFF LN time Le OFF time ud i _ ON time Cycle time a Duty cycle Cycle time the peak br
178. aking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 31 Powera Deceleration curve Overhauling load Avg braking power curve overhauling load Avg braking power E during deceleration Time to zero Temperature x Pati EM Time The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables e First determine your maximum braking time ON ONMAX minimum braking time OFF OFFMIN and load type deceleration or overhauling load e Calculate duty cycle ON wax Duty Cycle 100 ON ax OFF yin In the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONMAX lt column specification and Duty cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column For overhauling loads double the
179. al sqA1 sqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal Sqrt ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 FBK MULTIPLIER 4015 Default 0 000 NOT SEL Range 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 to 32 767 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier t Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL 32 768 to 32 767 Example FBK Multiplier x JA1 A2 Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 57 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PROCESS PID ACT1 INPUT 4016 SET 1 Group Parameter Name and Description Default 2 Al2 Range 1 7 Continued Ali Uses analog input 1 fo
180. alue SOM ABB DRV 1001 EXT1 COMMAND S 10 COMM 40001 bits 40031 bits O 1 0 3 1002 EXT2 COMMAND S 10 COMM 40001 bits 40031 bits O 1 0 3 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drive profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation E 6 3 Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied ES in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Decription 1102 EXT1 EXT2SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 E 6 3 1 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See Modbus Register 40002 for more information E 6 4 Miscellaneous Drive Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values s
181. ameter 0101 0178 If parameter does not exist the display shows wa 101 178 Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 SIGNAL3 MIN 3416 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 SIGNAL3 MAX 3417 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 49 Group Parameter Number PANEL OUTPUT3 DSP FORM DISPLAY 3418 Continued OUTPUTS UNIT 3419 OUTPUTS MIN 3420 OUTPUTS MAX 3421 MOTOR TEMP SENSOR TYPE 3501 MEAS 7 50 Parameter Descriptions Selection Value Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Name and Description Default 9 DIRECT Range 0 9 Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range 0 127 Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3415 Range Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display paramete
182. ameters 3401 3421 in Chapter 7 MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 5 6 2 5 1 How to Change the Direction of the Motor Rotation a __ _ A MM EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press wr repeatedly until you get there If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode To change the direction from forward O shown on the status line to reverse DIR O shown on the status line or vice versa press Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST 6 2 5 2 How to Set the Speed Frequency or Torque Reference EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press 77 repeatedly until you get there BEM 49 1 E uu 0 5 A 10 7 X DR 100 00 MENU If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing S The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press 4 y The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off To decrease the value press S w
183. and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 9 5 How to Reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key d assistant keypad through digital input or fieldbus or by turning the supply voltage off for a short time The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted 9 5 1 Fault resetting The ACB530 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACB530 may start immediately after fault reset 9 5 1 1 Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes 9 5 1 2 Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used toreset the drive digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started 9 5 1 3 History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example
184. and explanations of the contents Main display Information display REM PAR EDIT LOC F HELP Set exactly as given ion the motor nameplate If connected to multiple motors EXIT 00 00 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued 8 5 Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the keypad or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus or an optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool can also control the drive 8 10 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 5 1 Local control The control commands are given from the keypad keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display 49 1 Hz 10 3 X DIR 00 00 MENU The keypad always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control 8 5 2 External control When the drive is in external remote control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the keypad as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display C 49 1 Hz eo 2 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU DPI The us
185. ant speed is selected REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs Al LOSS Energize relay when Alf signal is lost AI2 LOSS Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary Ros Ros RO4 Ros Ro2 Ro 0 ooo o o o o o o 1 0001 o o o o o t 2 oo0 o o o o o 3 oo o o o o 1 4 ooo o o o 1 o o 5 62 2 lo fotooo 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number RELAY
186. applications This manual contains information on e Delivery inspection Safety instructions put in after delivery Installing and wiring the ACB530 drive Programming the drive References related to manuals The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is intended for both US and global use 1 1 2 Applicable Firmware Versions The manual is applicable to the ACB530 drive firmware version XXXXX or later See Parameter 3301 Firmware to confirm 1 1 3 Purpose of the Manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing start up operating and servicing the drive 1 1 4 Related Documents See List of related manuals on page 2 inside of the front cover 1 1 5 Categorization by Frame Size The ACB530 is manufactured in frame sizes R1 through R6 Frame site specific information is identified in this manual with the text R1 through R6 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings 1 2 Safety Notices This equipment contains voltages that may be as high as 1000 volts Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury Only qualified personnel should attempt the start up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment This equipment may be connected to other machines that have rotating parts or parts that are driven by this equipment Improper use can cause serious or fatal injury Only qual
187. asic unit columns define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification without installing any further options Column With du dt filters defines the cable lengths when an external du at filter is used The columns under heading EMC limits show the maximum cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC emissions The factory guarantees that these cable lengths meet the EMC standard requirements If external sine filters are installed longer cable lengths can be used With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable which has to be taken into account in engineering as well as the EMC limits where applicable The default switching frequency is 4 kHz WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 17 Examples for using the table Checking and Conclusions R1 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C2 150 m 490 ft cable R3 frame size 4 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable R5 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable R6 frame size 4 kHz fsw EMC limits not applicable 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable a du dt filter is needed Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met with a 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limit
188. asses NEM Without shipping package Inside shipping package Sinusoidal vibration Mechanical conditions In accordance with IEC In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications e 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in e 9 200 Hz 10 m s2 33 ft s2 Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s2 330 ft s2 11ms Free fall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61 cm 24 in frame size R2 46 cm 18 in frame size R3 e 31 cm 12 in frame size R4 e 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 e 15 cm 6 in frame size R6 A 4 Materials Table A 1 Material Specifications Drive enclosure e PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N e Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint is 80 100 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi e Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks
189. ate Start Up anid Operation esce Ee hr rh eee es Ax bona Ree 1 81 Electrical Saeta ree dio os ee d E RR E eie dt d D Roa id 182 General Safety u s nass oed ere OR eec Cg dac A OR n Rae oa n a A 1 9 Terms and AbDbreviatioriS 2k rire racer EE orta eese XC e b e xao e eae ie nara 1 10 Operation Principle and Hardware Description 0 000 Chapter 2 General Information and Ratings 2 1 Type Designation ec mmi edu ae a DUE a E ER Rd hee 2 171 Serial NUMBER tok i eut nda Ae AAS buses aude aos e S E Re bene e De 2 1 2 Ratings and Frame SIZe cdi Eee ae voe a ao E ex CR Ee eR IHR SA RR e 2 2 Degrees oft Protection ses poer e dE ee ae gr M ba e Reto n etaed son E ded Chapter 3 Installing the Drive 3 1 Mechanical Installation lene Red mieerbixaca etu ad egre m ace ala 3 11 What This Chapter Contains adc haan ee d Dl doe EX PE RR de DR 3 1 2 Checking the Installation Site o oooooooooocrrrarorrear nee 3 1 3 Requirements for the Installation Site 2 lille 3 1 4 Location Instructions oun ERI RI i Ree v rdg whee eee V pue Daal ee 3 1 5 Confirm That the Enclosure is Appropriate Based on the Site Contamination Level 3 1 6 Confirm That the Mounting Location Meets the Following Guidelines 3 2 Tools Reduir oa sna e ook hee Rem E obk EUER TERR RE E aE a NA EUR EROR ia E ER eet 3 3 Watts Loss Data ica arrabal 3 4 Dimensions and Weights ess esie irdi e pana a wae
190. ation block output signal Value is from either e PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs 1 l e Status is displayed as a binary number e 1 indicates that the input is activated l LI O indicates that the input is deactivated DI 1 DI2 DI3 Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs e See parameter 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Read Only Range 0 0 100 0 The relative value of analog input 1 in Read Only Range 0 0 100 0 The relative value of analog input 2 in Read Only Range 000 111 0 7 decimal Status of the three relay outputs e 1 indicates that the relay is energized 0 indicates that the relay is de energized S RELAY 1 STATUS RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS Read Only Range 0 0 20 0mA The analog output 1 value in milliamperes Read Only Range 0 0 20 0mA The analog output 2 value in milliamperes MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value OPERATING PID 1 OUTPUT 0126 DATA Continued Parameter Name and Description Read Only Range 1000 0 to 1000 0 The PID controller 1 output value in PID 1 SETPNT 0128 PID 1 FBK 0130 PID 1 DEVIATION 0132 COMM RO WORD 0134
191. ation deceleration ramp pair 2 It is also possible to activate jogging function 1 or 2 through fieldbus Jogging function 1 uses constant speed 7 and jogging function 2 uses constant speed 6 Both functions use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 8 33 1 Settings E 2207 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time Set to zero during the jogging ie linear ramp 8 33 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1401 Jogging function status through RO 1 1402 1406 Jogging function status through RO 2 6 8 30 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 34 Brake components 8 34 1 Availability Braking availability for ACB530 drives by frame size s e R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from Baldor e R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your Baldor representative for appropriate parts 8 34 2 Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RMIN defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum br
192. control panel e When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description SYSTEM PARAM SAVE 1607 Default O DONE CONTROLS Range 0 1 Continued DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory e Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter e If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter e If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory START ENABLE 1 1608 Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality SDI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal e This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal e lf the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal
193. ct if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 OUTPUTS MAX 6 8 Using the Keypad ra n 07 NNI LOC UPAR ED T 3401 SI GNALI PARAM REQ 103 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDLT 3408 SI GNAL2_PARAM CURRE 104 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDLT 3415 SI GNAL3 PARAM TORQUE 105 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDLT 3404 QUTPUT1 DSP FORM DIRECT 9 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR ED T 3405 OUTPUT1 UN T 3 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR ED T 3406 OUTPUT MN Hz an CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR ED T 900 0 MAX 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE MN796 ACB530 6 2 7 Assistants Mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up assistant is divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor set up or PID control The Start up assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section
194. ct the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal 7 Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail 8 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s 9 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at the drive end 10 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table Use a tightening torque of 0 4N m 0 3Ib ft Figure 4 7 e o Oy MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 7 4 5 7 Wiring IP54 UL Type 12 Enclosure with Conduit 1 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques DARON Figure 4 8 Tightening Torque Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper shield into a bundle pig tail 9 Connect the ground shield bundle pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground on
195. culations A CALC MOTOR MODEL is especially effective when e vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 OPEN VECTOR or 2 V F CONTROL and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder NOTE The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment NOTE If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the CALC MOTOR MODEL WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the CALC MOTOR MODEL The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the CALC MOTOR MODEL See also section How to perform the CALC MOTOR MODEL NOTE CALC MOTOR MODEL 9910 can only be modified if the drive is stopped MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value OPERATING MOTOR COSPHI 9915 DATA Continued Group 0 0 01 0 97 SPEED amp DIR 0101 SPEED 0102 OUTPUT FREQ 0103 CURRENT 0104 TORQUE 0105 POWER 0106 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 DRIVE TEMP 0110 EXTERNAL REF 1 0111 EXTERNAL REF 2 0112 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 0 Range 0 0 97 IDENTIFIED Drive identifies the cos phi automatically by estimation Value entered used as t
196. d Parameter Number Selection Value REFERENCE REF2 MIN 1107 Default 0 096 SELECT Range 0 0 100 096 0 0 600 096 for torque Group Parameter Name and Description Continued S zm ets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in 96 e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal e This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque REF2 MAX 1108 Default 100 096 Range 0 0 100 096 0 0 600 096 for torque Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in 96 e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque CONSTANT CONST SPEED SEL 1201 Default 9 SPEEDS Range 14 to 19 O NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 Digital input activated 2 Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above DI 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI
197. d 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed Displays parameter 0101 0178 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 101 178 Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 SIGNAL2 MIN 3409 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 SIGNAL2 MAX 3410 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Default 9 DIRECT 8411 Range 0 9 Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 OUTPUT UNIT 3412 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range 0 127 Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 OUTPUT MIN 3413 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 OUTPUT2 MAX 3414 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3408 Range Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 SIGNAL3 PARAM 3415 Default 105 Parameter 0105 TORQUE Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed Displays par
198. d mm yy The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d Default Range Time hh mm ss Time of the peak value detection Format hours minutes seconds Default Range 0 0 6553 5 A Current at the moment of the peak value amperes Default Range 0 65535 V DC voltage at the moment of the peak value volts Default Range 0 0 6553 5 Hz Output frequency at the moment of the peak value hertz Default Range Date dd mm yy power on time in days Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 e Format Date if the real time clock is operating dd mm yy The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set xx d Default Range Time hh mm ss Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 e Format hours minutes seconds Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N O 10 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 10 2096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 20 3096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current I2N 30 4096 distribution Default Range 0 0 100 096 Amplitude logger 1
199. dbus control with comm Embedded fieldbus embedded fieldbus on page 377 and Fieldbus adapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 337 Control panel KEYPAD 8 6 Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and keypad signals The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions addition subtraction multiplication and division The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions addition and multiplication The drive reference can be given with frequency input In external control location EXT1 2 the drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through Sequence programming by using a mathematical function addition 8 12 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits 8 6 1 Settings Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source type and scaling Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramp
200. deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in the figure e Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve e Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 Parameter Descriptions 7 33 Group ACCEL DECEL Continued SPEED CONTROL Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value ACCELER TIME 2 2205 DECELER TIME 2 2206 RAMP SHAPE 2 2207 EMERG DEC TIME 2208 RAMP INPUT 0 2209 PROP GAIN 2301 7 34 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 e See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 e See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging deceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 to 1000 0 s Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 e See
201. ding to the figure The switching frequency may be reduced im if the ACB530 internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure This function 12 kHz allows the highest possible switching 8 kHz Dive frequency to be used based on operating i temperature conditions Higher switching frequency AkHz poor results in lower acoustic noise R1 R4 drives see par 2606 R5 R6 drives see par 2606 80 C 90 C 700 C r SLIP COMP RATIO 2608 Default 0 Range 0 200 Sets gain for slip compensation in e A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE 2 V F CONTROL 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 10096 means full slip compensation NOISE SMOOTHING 2609 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 0 DISABLE ENABLE This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz 7 38 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection
202. direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 The maximum input signal runs the drive 9 REF 1 at maximum reference in the forward 2V 4 mA direction Define the maximum using OV OMA ext REF 1 MIN parameter 1105 e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST k a EKE RER TOMIN WW ysteresis 4 of full scale YA gt WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive e Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 20 2V or 4mA e Set parameter 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher e Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 Al2 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above Al1 JOYST description DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up e Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Defin
203. e Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch between remote and local control 8 6 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 2 2 STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR Start by switching digital input DI1 to ON Assistant Keypad The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Alt 8 2 3 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off 8 2 4 STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Assistant keypad The arrow stops rotating Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly 0 0 0 DIR 00 00 MENU 76 8 3 Performing Motor Model Calc The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 Motor model calc has value NO In most applications there is no need to perform a Calc Motor Model Should be set to YES if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 OPEN VECTOR operation point is near zero speed and or permanent magnet synchronous motor is used and the back em
204. e 2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 0 0 Final reference limited by 4012 4013 PID set 1 reference 10000 par 1108 or 4112 4113 PID set 2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM Al1 or COMM Al1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMMM AH COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 i AI input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 REF1 COMM Al1 ate eA A m Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 H i AI1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 REF2 COMM Al1 UUIVIIVIL7O VAI 20 09 Ace NAA Fieldbus reference 2 correction coefficient Alt input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 20 ae REF2 COMM Al1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficent Altinput signal Reference handling MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 31 Use START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positi
205. e EFB this parameter is O protocol 0 ABB DFV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 NOTE After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station ID 5302 E 6 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB E 6 1 Controlling the Drive Fieldbus Control of various drive functions requires configuration to e tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function e define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control e define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 3 E 6 2 Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 3 A A Deedat Modbus Protocol Reference rive Parameter
206. e are most easily dealt with using the following tables e First determine your maximum braking time ON ON minimum braking time OFF OFF and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle Duty cycl Nmax 100 uty cycle eS 0 yy ON max OFF mn 4 14 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 e n the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONMAX lt column specification and Duty cycle x column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column For overhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column Table 4 8 208 240V Drives gt Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Resistance A Deceleration to Zero Rating Prcont p Pr10 Continuous ON ACB530 U1 60s ON see below Three phase supply voltage 208 240V 0446 2 234 80 X 45 X 80 X 120 X 200 1100 06A6 2 160 so 65 120 175 280 1500 012A2 80 44 125 235 8345 57 300 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Table 4 9 380 480V Drives Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Resistance E A Deceleration to Zero Rating Prcont y Pr30 Pr60 Continuous ON ACB530 U1 lt 30 s ON lt 60 s ON gt 60 s ON see below gt 180 s OFF Sao Ore lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt
207. e below lt 3s ON lt 10 s ON 30 s ON gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty Pircent 180 s OFF 25 Duty Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V Lore se Jo Je pe 29 es pe oaase ss eo po x Jn foa u oare ea eo es es Jeo foo sss ooe us fo fee os fes e sse Lon s uo fo e sz we me 7 oae m eo es ee see sus Jime Resistor time constant specification must be 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols RMIN Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor RMAX Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONMAX time MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 33 8 34 3 Installing and wiring resistors All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that
208. e following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system e The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive e The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 7 Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACB530 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by e marginally loose connections e wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations e insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables E 9 Modbus Protocol Technical Data E 9 1 Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 n
209. e housing up to remove from the drive 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive 9 9 4 2 Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from the drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Restore power guo MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 11 9 9 5 Capacitors 9 9 5 1 Reforming the Capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label to find the manufacturing date from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for capacitor reforming in ACB530 available on the Internet go to http www baldor com 9 9 6 Power Connections WARNING Read and follow all Safety Notices Ignoring the Safety Notices can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connect
210. e instructions given in this manual The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 284 for the frame size and switching frequency in use Boma Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive C 3 Motor cable requirements for CE 8 C Tick compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance C 3 1 Minimum requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable shield for example MCMK Draka NK Cables MN796 ACB530 CE Guidelines C 1 Insulation IM Copper X shield Inner insulation c Cable core C 3 2 Recommendation for conductor layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE c
211. e is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value EZ CW 0000 0000 0000 a 1 a This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON Bit 15 a Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding 3 CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE EAEE 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference E 18 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 SW Bit3 1 SW Bis 0 SW Bi4 0 J CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 Y EN d From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 IN BO OFF1 MANSOFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 I0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 E ABCD NOT READY a TO SWITCH ON SW Bft0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW oox x1xx xxxx x110 a OPERATION READY TO an SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON SW Bi
212. e maximum size is 1 mm 5 2 3 Control Terminals Table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive Table 5 3 A H ardwareDescription________ Terminal for signal cable shield screen Connected internally to chassis ground Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 196 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used 2 Alt 9 J1 AH OFF 0 10V R 312 kohm J1 Ali ON 0 20mA R 100 kohm AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm Al2 Analog Potentiometer reference source 10V 2 max 10mA 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm J1 Al2 ON 0 20mA R 100 kohm Analog output programmable Default current 0 20mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 GND Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be gt 10V or lt 10V between that input 12 DCOM and DCOM The 24V may be provided be the ACB530 X1 10 or be an external 12 24V source of either polarity Digital input 6 programmable Default not used 1 0 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used 5 9 J1 AI2 OFF 0 10V R 312 kohm Digital Inputs DI DI2 DIS DI4 DI5 6 8 9 5 2 Control Wiring MN796
213. e nube rk a REG E Ade eee lames E 6 E 7 2 Actual Valu SCaling in eire kde ae pito ok ao ck ox DR ica a id an A E 6 E 8 Diagnostics EFB joined cece DER Pee ee rr pe ER GR RU RARO RUE a de ake ees E 7 E 8 1 Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics 0 0 eee E 7 E 8 2 Serial Communication Diagnostics llle E 7 E 8 3 Diagnostic Situations uenerunt A gaa wd wp RC RUN RR mE E 7 E 9 Modbus Protocol Technical Datas ooo lige a em mr ud Re E REA RR dae E 8 E 9 1 OV6ervIeW 22 2 a me pre daa dee e hab pera Pigs Poked E a E ERA E 8 E 9 2 Modbus Addressing neer a o E KA RR Foe up eius oda EE e edd E 9 E 10 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data ooocccocccocooooo en E 14 E 10 1 OVGrVIOW spe K donor w gees risen uoi ee dados f odo ea EE we badd daa a E 14 E 10 2 Control Word 2 srizaigese ecicl4 ge rk lua e a pu PEerURIWRDDLIURDS EIS E 14 E 10 3 Status Word ima eb Rede a e RU E 16 E 10 4 State Diagram 222 A EEE eee REE eG A ees E 18 E 10 5 Reference Scaling odia ta eee tw ed dha ew da we E 20 Esl Fieldbus Adapter 2m oru A eG tee e E ate di Opa Feci ese pte Glare E 21 E 11 1 Control Interface neos e a de dba aaa RR oe E 21 E 11 2 Control Word s ea iras O o pui ER altes qupd xac abd ee eek E 22 E 12 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA o ooooccooocccoooooor e E 23 E 13 Communication Set Up FBA vico oi a pee A Ew Pee Ree REIR RD E 23 E 14 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA e eese sebrar ceceni n
214. e of parameter 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 the counter does not roll over Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE e See Group ENERGY SAVING SAVED AMOUNT 2 0177 Read Only Range 0 65535 Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy econsumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 the counter does not roll over e See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 7 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value OPERATING SAVED CO2 0178 Read Only DATA Range 0 0 6553 5 tn Continuea R A ym eduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AM
215. e rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 10096 1 C 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 or 0 90 Altitude Derating In altitudes 1000 4000m 3300 13 200ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100m 330ft If the installation site is higher than 2000m 6600ft above sea level contact your local Baldor District Office for further information Single Phase Supply Derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 5096 Switching Frequency Derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 8096 When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 derate all rated currents and powers including drive s overload currents to 6596 to 5096 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACB530 U1 032A 6 ACB530 U1 062A 6 e derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F e Note The continuous maximum current is limited to Note Setting parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C with 12kHz switching freq
216. econds e Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation e Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value e f the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal 7 54 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Group PROCESS PID SET 1 Continued Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value INTEGRATION TIME 4002 0 0 0 1 3600 0 s DERIVATION TIME 4003 PID DERIV FILTER 4004 ERROR VALUE INV 4005 UNITS 4006 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 60 0 s Range 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller Integration time seconds Defines the PID controller s integration time Integration time is by definition
217. ected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AOT Speed J1 Actual value Al2 Analog output AO2 Current 2 T AN 0 10V Start stop hand PID D11 6 Relay output 1 Ready i 2 p gt AI2 0 4 20 mA EXTI EXT2 selection DI2 Relay output 2 Running or Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 JI Run enable DI5 X Jo AlM 0 10V 10 AI2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start 5 10 Control Wiring MN796 ACB530 5 5 Connection Examples of Two Wire and Three Wire Sensors Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 AI2 The operating mode wiring diagrams for each operating mode in this chapter use an externally powered sensor connections not shown The figures below give examples of connections using a two wire or three wire sensor transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output Figure 5 11 Two Wire Sensor Transmitter X1 control board P 4 20mA S5 lAI2 Process actual value measurement pp 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA R in 100 ohm X1 control board 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 11 GND 24V DC 250mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply v
218. ecting device IEC EN 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage Systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods MN796 ACB530 Technical Specifications A 1 Table A 1 Marks Applicable standards IEC EN 61000 3 12 Electromagnetic compatibility EMO Part 3 12 Limits Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low voltage systems with input current gt 16 A and 75 A per phase IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment for ACB530 U1 drives only A 2 1 CE Marking A 2 1 1 Compliance with the EMC Directive A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Note The 600 V ACB530 U1 drives are not CE approved The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC
219. ed for the motor to reach 6396 of the final temperature with steady load t e For thermal protection according to i i UL requirements for NEMA class motors P 58 4 use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM 4 7 TIME equals 35 times t6 where t6 Wi in seconds is specified by the motor t manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s 7 40 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value FAULT MOT LOAD CURVE 3007 Default 100 FUNCTIONS Range 50 150 Group Parameter Name and Description Continued Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor e With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning 150 when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value Bud dE e The default overloadability is at the a same level as what motor P3008 50 manufacturers typically allow below 30 C 86 F ambient temperature Frequency and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient temperature exceeds P 3009 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant pr
220. ed with the FBA module for the appropriate entry E 14 1 Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied oo in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is p dependent 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with EXT1 selected 1002 EXT COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus E 14 2 Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires drive parameter value set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive Parameter Parameter Value O REND Reference 1102 NINE SEL wm Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AH 10 COMMPAL 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AIT Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM ALI NOTE Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile NOTE Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled E 14 3 System control Using the fie
221. eed 2 0203 3 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 o o 1 Constant speed 4 1205 1 o 1 Constant speed 5 1206 o 1 1 Constant speed 6 1207 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 for code DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 for code DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated DI2 INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above DH 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated Por Di2 Function o fji Constant speed 1 1202 1 jo Constant speed 2 1203 lo jo Constant speed 3 1204 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DIG See above DI 2 INV for code DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 e See above DI1 2 INV for code DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 INV for code DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above DI 2 INV for code DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of
222. efault 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the minimum for external reference 1 A ESTE The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or max amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog A x P 1104 Analog input signal MIN input signal These parameters reference and analog P1301 P 1302 min and max settings provide scale or 1304 OF 1305 and offset adjustment for the reference Extref P 1104 MIN P 1105 MAX i i i P 1301 P 1302 or 1304 or 1305 Analog gt input signal Default 60 0 62 0 Hz 1800 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the maximum for external reference 1 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal Default 2 Range 0 17 19 21 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source Al Defines analog input 1 Al1 as the reference source Al2 Defines analog input 2 Al2 as the reference source Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 Al1 EXT REF 1 MAX configured for joystick operation as the reference source e The minimum input signal runs the drive en TIME z at the maximum reference in the reverse SDT REE IMIN
223. either one after the other as the Start up assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all 8 8 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 See the section on Assistants mode for information on how to start the Start up assistant or other assistants 8 4 1 2 Default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 OPERATING MODE the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Table 8 1 Default Order of Tasks Application selection Default tasks ABB 2 WIRE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals ABB 3 WIRE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals BALDOR 2 WIRE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals MOTOR POT Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals HAND AUTO Language select Motor set up Application Option modules
224. ement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using Pt100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors T AO GND GND L p 3 3nF aid AE L WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 0 3 in 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive anda digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 Thermistor WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 0 3 in 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not
225. ency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above Default 0 0s Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale e Parameter 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation e Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation e Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See the figures C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up Default 0 50 s Range 0 0 60 00 s Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEV for at least this time period re starts the PID controller Default 0 00 Range 0 00 655 35 Price of energy per kWh e Used for reference when energy savings are calculated e See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn Default 0 5 tn MWh Range 0 00 1
226. er 0303 Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU profiles STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 40034 ACS355 Status word MSW 40033 Status word LSW EA Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU profile s STATUS WORD For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers transmitting response to the master request EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACB530 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single roo register Actual values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written a
227. er can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time 8 5 3 Settings Panel Key Additional Information LOC REM Selection between local and external remote control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Reference source for EXT1 EXT2 8 5 4 Diagnostics Actual Signal Additional Information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference 8 5 5 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXTA MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 11 Figure 8 1 Start Stop Direction source for EXT1 Select pH D DIS EXT1 DIS G NN gt irection Fieldbus selection See chapters COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with 1001 embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter on page 377 and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 337 Control panel KEYPAD 8 5 6 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1 Figure 8 2 Reference Source for EXT1 Alt AI1 Al2 DI3 DI4 DIS Al2 DIS Fieldbus selection REFT SS DI4 See chapters Hz rpm DIS Fiel
228. ernal system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACB530 can either e receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or e be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices Connect using either standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available e embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol fieldbus adapter FBA E 2 1 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of eOutput words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 elInput words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 E 3 Planning Network planning should address the following questions 1 What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network 2 What control information must be sen
229. es on both sides at the top 2 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Figure 3 7 IP21 UL type 1 3 6 2 IP54 UL type 12 For the IP54 UL type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots 1 As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive 2 R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step 3 Position the ACB530 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACB530 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 4 Reinstall the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Figure 3 8 IP54 UL type 12 3 8 Installing the Drive MN796 ACB530 Chapter 4 Power Wiring 4 1 Electrical installation 4 1 1 What this chapter contains This chapter describes how to connect the power cables incoming main power lines and motor power cabling to the ACB530 Drive It also addresses compatibility of the ACB530 with certain special power systems including IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN Systems WARNING
230. et 3 parameters from the keypad to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET3 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 14 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 11 1 How to Upload and Download Parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Note that the drive has to be in local control for uploading and downloading 4 ANI L Go to the Main menu by pressing Y if you are in the Output mode otherwise by 5 zm aM i FAMI N pressing ES repeatedly until you get to the Main menu If REM is shown on the status line press first E to switch to local control p CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 a and y 7 and pressing ae Cae OR PANEL a AC KI JP i DOWLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLI CATI ON DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the LOC w PAR BACKUP drive to the keypad select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup menu with keys and 2 and press E During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press if you want to stop the operation Copying parameters ERIS 50 O ABOR 00 00 After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the 5o su C UMESSAGE rameter upload completion Press
231. et as defined WM e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Reference Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Decription 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit3 40031 bit 6 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset through by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is the fieldbus 40031 bit 14 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory than 41607 value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the fieldbus 40032 bit 2 Command word 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the fieldbus 40032 bit 3 Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torque selection is the 40031 bit 15 fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the p 40031 bit 15 fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is the fieldbus 40031 bit 10 E 4 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 E 6 5 Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Dr
232. etwork with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACB530 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACB530 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACB530 Function Code Hex Additional information Read Coil Status Ox01 Read discrete output status For the ACB530 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACB530 the individual bits of the status word Status are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1zInput 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACB530 the entire parameter set is Holding Registers mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACB530 the 2 analog input channels are Registers mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACB530 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register
233. f voltage is unknown Note If motor parameters group START UP DATA are changed after the motor model calc it must be repeated MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 7 8 3 1 Motor Model Calc The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here The motor model calc cannot be performed without a keypad 8 3 1 1 PRE CHECK WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the motor model calc The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the motor model calc O De couple the motor from the driven equipment O If parameter values group OPERATING DATA to group OPTIONS are changed before the motor model calc check that the new settings meet the following conditions e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed e 2003 MAX CURRENT gt lyy e 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 Check that the Run enable signal is on parameter 1601 040000 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown at the top Press key 2 to switch between local and remote control 8 3 1 2 MOTOR MODEL CALC WITH THE ASSISTANT KEYPAD O Change parameter 9910 Calc Motor Model YES Save the new setting by REM _ULPAR EDIT md Y 9910 CALC MOTOR MODEL 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE O If you want to monitor actual values during the Motor Model Calc go to the E Output mode by
234. failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMPMEAS 2011 UNDERLOAD 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 3 Table 9 1 Alarm Listing Alarm 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset which 1 may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2016 RESERVED Not used 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means that the motor Note 1 could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends e To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 MOTOR MODEL Performing Motor Model Calc Run CALC 2020 RESERVED START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration e Communication settings START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns tha
235. fault 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI e Units are rpm unless 9904 CONTROL TYPE 2 V F CONTROL then units are Hz CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO e Units are rpm unless 9904 CONTROL TYPE 2 V F CONTROL then units are Hz CRIT SPEED 2 LO 2504 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 2505 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 2506 Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2502 7 36 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Group CRITICAL SPEEDS Continued MOTOR CONTROL MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value CRIT SPEED 3 HI 2507 FLUX OPT ENABLE 2601 0 FLUX BRAKING 2602 IR COMP VOLT 2603 Parameter Name and Description Default 0 0 Hz 0 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM Sets t
236. fective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT O NOUNIT 9 C 18 2 MWh 27 ft 36 l s 45 Pa 54 lb m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 lmin 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 12 mV 21 dmYV s 30 FPM 39 mYVs 48 gal m 57 ft s 66 2 m min 4 96 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m m 49 galh 58 inH O 67 Nm 52s 142W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 inwg 68 Km h 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 lbsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 lb s 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 96FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PANEL SIGNAL2 PARAM 3408 Default 104 Parameter 0104 CURRENT DISPLAY Range 100 NOT SELECTED 101 178 Group Parameter Name and Description Continue
237. fines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is parameter 0301 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 INV above Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration e See below for the ramp definition parameters Default 5 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to max A Linear maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 PES a See A in the figure e Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ MAX S curve FREQ g s A A 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Default 5 0 s Range 0 0 1800 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 e Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 to 1000 0 s Selects the shape of the acceleration
238. formation with keys lt 4 gt and Y Press 7 to return to the Par backup menu 6 16 Using the Keypad r LOC UMA N VENU 1 PARAMETERS CHANGED PAR EXT 00 00 ENTER LOC W PAR BACKUP 1 UPLOAD fe TO PANEL BACKI ID DOWNLOAD ULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLI CATI ON DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC el NFO Of VE C550 3504 DR VE RATI NG 4A6 3301 FI EOD UD EXI 00 pe v BACKUP NFO 3564 DRI VE RATI NG 4A62i 3301 FI RMMRE 300F hex EXIT 00 00 LOC tw PAR BACKUP 1 DOWNLOAD APPLI CATI ON DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL MN796 ACB530 6 2 12 I O Settings Mode In the I O settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value Al1 you can change its value to e g Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to Al1 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 2 12 1 How to Edit and Change Parameter Settings Related to I O Terminals EJ O Display 1 MENU LOC MAI N MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing MO if you are in the Output mode otherwise by lisy RAMETERS FN 1 pressing amp repeatedly until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 00
239. fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input 8 28 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 32 1 Settings Parameter Additional information Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings Group 15 ANALOG Analog output settings OUTPUTS MEAS At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through eg a 3 3 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected 8 32 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT Excessive motor temp OVERTEMP 8 33 Jogging The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine section One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle When it is on the drive starts accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate When it is off the drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input Start cmd State of the drive start command The function operates on a 2 ms time level Speed t t tt t 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1
240. gardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that e the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F e the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 P a If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload In multimotor systems the output current of the drive must be equal to or greater than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors 2 1 1 1 Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see section Switching frequency derating 2 4 General Information and Ratings MN796 ACB530 Referring to in the ratings tables the following drives exceed the I2N requirement of 19 25 A ACB530 x1 023A 4 or ACB530 x1 024A 2 Temperature Derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F th
241. h Modbus reference set MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 9 E 9 2 1 Oxxxx Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils e bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set ABB DRV LIM Profiles 5305 0 00001 CONTROL WORD Bit 0 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 NA NA Modbus Reference Bi N A 00014 Bi N A 00015 Bi N A 00016 i N A 00017 i 00018 i 00019 i 00020 00021 00032 00033 00034 00035 00036 00037 00038 Does not apply 1 Active Low For the Oxxxx registers e Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially The ACB530 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function Code 01 05 15 OxOF Hex E 10 Fieldbus Communications ABB DRV LIM 5305 0 STOP START REVERSE LOCAL RESET EXT2 RUN DISABLE STPMODE R STPMODE EM STPMODE C RAMP 2 RAMP OUT 0 RAMP HOLD RAMP IN 0 REQ LOCALLOCK TORQLIM2 FBLOCAL CTL FBLOCAL REF START DISABLE1 START DISABLE2 Reserved 5305 2 N A Does not apply Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 5 Relay
242. h a drive is specified in the PROFIdrive profile v4 published by PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL ControlNet RCNA 01 The ControlNet network uses an RG 6 quad shielded cable or fibre with Adapter support for media redundancy The RCNA 01 Adapter module supports only RG 6 quad shielded cable coax for the bus connection ControlNet is flexible in topology options bus tree star to meet various application needs The fieldbus speed is 5 Mbits s The RCNA 01 ControlNet Adapter module can not originate connections on its own but a scanner node can open a connection towards it The ControlNet protocol is implemented according to the ControlNet International specification for a Communication adapter Flange Mounting Kits FMK A R1 Flange Mounting Kits for the ACB530 drives allows mounting the drive with FMK A R2 the heatsink external to a 3rd party enclosure Use of the flange kit requires removal of the drive cover reducing protection to IPOO R1 through R4 FMK A R3 flange kits can be used with 3rd party UL Type 1 amp 12 NEMA 1 amp 12 FMK A R4 enclosures R5 and R6 kits provide NEMA 1 protection only AC8 FLNGMT R5 AC8 FLNGMT R6 D 2 Options and Kits MN796 ACB530 Chapter EAppendix E Fieldbus Communications E 1 What This Chapter Contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus E 2 Overview The ACB530 can be set up to accept control from an ext
243. he center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected e Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Figure 6 1 Assistant Keypad 6 2 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 3 Status Line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive Figure 6 2 Status Line LOC UMA N MENU 1 006 LOC 45 49 0 No Field Alternatives Drive control is local that is from the keypad Drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State Forward shaft direction Reverse shaft direction 3 1 Control location Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing BENE 6 2 4 Operation You operate the keypad with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft
244. he cos phi Defines the nominal motor cos phi power factor The parameter improves performance especially with high efficiency motors NOTE MOTOR COSPHI 9915 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Read Only Range 30000 to 30000 RPM The calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 SPEED e The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction e The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction Read Only Range 0 to 30000 RPM The calculated speed of the motor rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode Read Only Range 0 0 500 0 Hz The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode Read Only Range 0 0 2 0 The motor current as measured by the ACB530 Shown by default in the control panel Output mode Read Only Range 200 0 to 200 0 Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode Read Only Range 2 0 P to 2 0 P The measured motor power in kW Read Only Range 0 V to 2 5 V yy The DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACB530 Default Range 0 V to 2 0 V The voltage applied to the mot
245. he full duplex Ethernet bandwidth It overcomes the overhead normally associated with Ethernet by employing on the fly processing hardware An EtherCAT bus consists of a master system and up to 65535 slave devices connected together with standard Ethernet cabling The RECA 01 supports 10 100 Mbps transfer rate with network connections made with CAT 5 wiring and RJ 45 connectors Designed for daisy chain configuration on an EtherCAT network MN796 ACB530 Options and Kits D 1 Option Part Number Descpion Ethernet RETA 01 The RETA 01 Adapter module supports the Modbus TCP and EtherNet Adapter IP network protocols Modbus TCP is a variant of the Modbus family of simple vendor neutral communication protocols intended for supervision and control of automation equipment The implementation of the Modbus TCP server in the RETA 01 module is done according to the Modbus TCP Specification 1 0 The Modbus TCP protocol allows the RETA 01 module to be used as an Ethernet bridge to control the drive The RETA 01 module supports eight simultaneous IP connections Ethernet IP is based on the Common Industrial Protocol CIP which is also the framework for both the ControlNet and DeviceNet networks Ethernet IP uses standard Ethernet and TCP IP technology to transport CIP communication packets The module fulfills all requirements for certification as an Ethernet IP device Ethernet RETA 02 The RETA 02 Adapter module supports the Modbus
246. he manual start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in section Performing a manual start up below 8 1 1 Starting up the drive without a keypad POWER UP 1 Apply input power and wait for a moment 2 Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking The drive is now ready for use 8 1 2 Performing a manual start up For the manual start up you can use the assistant keypad Before you start ensure that you have obtained the motor nameplate data 8 1 2 1 POWER UP O Apply input power REM I CHOICE Do you want to The assistant keypad asks if you want to run the Start up assistant If yu fuse the start up press EX the Start up assistant is not run and you can continue with the assistant manual start up procedure described below NO EXIT 00 00 OK 8 1 2 2 MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA parameter group 99 O Onthe assistant keypad select the needed language from parameter 9901 REM UPAR EDIT for the values of the available language alternatives 9901 LANGUAGE See Chapter 6 for assistance on editing parameters ENGLISH 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE O Select the operating mode parameter 9902 according to how the control cables are connected The default value ABB 2 wire is suitable in most cases MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc 8 Customizing Your Application 8 1 O Select the control type parameter 9904
247. he maximum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2503 Default O OFF Range 0 1 OFF Disables the feature ON Enables the feature Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load Default 0 OFF Range 0 1 OFF Disables the feature ON Enables the feature i j Brakin o em 2 2 kW magnetization in the motor SERRA shia ns braking 9 15 kW n 3 37 kW when needed instead anlaa G75 kW of limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in the motor the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal energy in the motor e Requires parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE 1 OPEN VECTOR 40 50 40 Default Size Dependent Range 0 0 100 0 V Sets the IR compensation voltage used for O Hz e Requires parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE 2 V F CONTROL Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating Typical IR compensation values are IR comp V 18 15 12 8 3 IR compensation e When enabled IR compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque A Motor voltage A IR compensated B No compensation P 2603 Parameter Descriptions
248. he reference controlled in local control mode Default O Range 6 to 8 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 DI2 INV to DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals NOTE EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1102 can only be mod
249. ible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors Default O Range 0 Ox FFFF Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol e Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision Default 1 Range 0 65535 Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique NOTE EFB STATION ID 5302 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 9 6 kbits s Range 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s Default 0 8 NONE 1 Range 0 3 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations Default 0 ABB DRV LIM Range 0 2 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile
250. ified if the drive is stopped Parameter Descriptions 7 13 Group Parameter Number REFERENCE REF1 SELECT 1103 SELECT Continued MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Selection Value 10 11 12 13 14 Parameter Name and Description Default 1 Range 0 17 20 21 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source Al1 Defines analog input 1 Al1 as the reference source Al2 Defines analog input 2 Al2 as the reference source Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 Al1 ExT se 1 wx configured forjoystick operation as the reference source ert e The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 e The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward MUR ma direction Define the maximum using M ExT Ree 1 MIN parameter 1105 e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST XEXT REF TMIN um Hysteresis 496 of full scale a WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive e Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 20 2V or 4mA e
251. ified personnel should attempt the start up procedure or troubleshoot this equipment 1 3 Use of Warnings Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following types of warnings are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment 1 4 Safety Related to Installation and Maintenance These warnings are intended for anyone who works on the drive power cables or motor 1 4 1 Electrical Safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive MN796 ACB530 Introduction 1 1 e Never work on the drive power cables or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the internal circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or power cables Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that 1 there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground 2 there is no voltage between terminals BRK and BRK and the ground e Do not work
252. in fieldbus adapter is activated Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference is a 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module Actual Values Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 E 22 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 E 12 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Ove
253. in low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61000 3 12 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 3 12 Limits Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low voltage systems with input current gt 16 A and 75 A per phase UL508C Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment CSA C22 2 No 14 Standard for Industrial Control Equipment A 1 2 Environmental Test Standards A 1 3 Marks See also Appendix C for general recommendations for CE compliance A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Note The 600V ACB530 U1 drives are not CE approved A 2 Applicable standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type designation label Table A 1 Marks Mark Applicable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconn
254. indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 above DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 INV above Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault EXTERNAL FAULT 2 3004 Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 6 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault e See parameter 3003 above MOT THERM PROT 3005 Default 1 FAULT Range 1 2 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP Defines the drive response to motor overheating MOT THERM TIME 3006 Default 500 s Range 256 9999 s Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model REN This is the time requir
255. ing active DI1 de activated jogging inactive DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above DI1 INV Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated jogging inactive DI1 de activated jogging active DI2 INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 NOTE JOGGING SEL 1004 can only be modified if the drive is stopped 7 12 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value REFERENCE KEYPAD REF SEL 1101 SELECT Group EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1102 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 1 Range 1 2 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 OPEN VECTOR e Frequency reference Hz if 9904 2 V F CONTROL REF2 96 Selects t
256. ions Use the tightening torques given Terminal and lead through data for the power cables 3 Restore power 9 9 7 Keypad 9 9 7 1 Cleaning the Keypad Use a soft damp cloth to clean the keypad Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window 9 9 7 2 Changing the Battery in the Assistant Keypad A battery is only used in assistant keypads that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the keypad Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any keypad or drive functions except the clock 9 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance MN796 ACB530 Chapter A Technical Specifications A 1 Standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type designation label A 1 1 Design and Test Standards EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations e EC EN 60204 1 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 Insulation coordination for equipment with
257. ithout making changes press MN796 ACB530 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by LOC UMA N MENU ARAME ETE DS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 CENTER LOC ME DATE 1 EXI T T 00 00 SEL LOC UCLOCK VISI B 1 Hide cloc EXIT 100 00 SEL LOC DATE FORMAT 1 ad CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC UTIME FORMAT 1 12 CANCEL 00 00 LOC USET TI ME E 41 CANCEL 00 00 LOC USET DATE E 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 Using the Keypad 6 13 6 2 11 Parameter Backup Mode The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to three user sets to the assistant keypad The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the keypad to another drive or the same drive Uploading and downloading can be performed in local control The keypad memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter backup mode you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the keypad UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID run View the information about the backup stored to the keypad
258. itions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description REFERENCE REF2 SELECT 1106 Default 2 SELECT Continued Range 0 17 19 21 Continued DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except e A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 Al1 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 Al1 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference cor
259. ive Parameter Decription Reference 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 40134 bit O or 0000033 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 40134 bit 1 or 0000034 35 COMM 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module NOTE Relay Status Feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Decription Reference 0122 Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 Relay 4 6 status 40123 E 6 6 Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Decription Reference Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to Poe Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to Poe E 6 7 PID Control Setpoint Source Use the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Decription Reference 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 8 COMM VALUE 1 n 4110 SET POINT SEL Set2 9 COMM AI Wr input reference 2 40003 10 COMM Al1 MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 5 E 6 8 Communication Fault When using the fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost
260. ived e 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors e 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication If communication is lost parameters 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME can be used to reconfigure the ACB530 No master station on line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another e The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance e The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of th
261. keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key Name of the current mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state eg PAR EDIT Keypad operation mode Reference value or number of the selected item Reference value in the Output mode Number of the highlighted item e g mode parameter group or fault You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the 45 and SY arrow keys until the option is highlighted and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key CZ you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key X7 is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The assistant keypad has nine keypad modes Output mode Parameter mode Assistants mode Changed parameters mode Fault logger mode Time and date mode Parameter backup mode I O settings mode and Fault mode The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Initially the keypad is in the Output mode LOC uy 49 TFE where you can start stop change the 49 1 Hz direction switch between local and remote 0 5 A control modify the reference value and monitor 10 7 up to three actual value
262. l is in P3401 137 49 1 Hz me control mode 5 E P 3408 138 e Any parameter number in Group L OPERATING DATA can be E ie selected i e Using the following parameters LOC v wez the display value can be scaled 4 50 converted to convenient units P 3404 7 0 4 A and or displayed as a bar graph 24 4 The figure identifies selections pFR 1 00 00 T MENU made by parameters in this group e lf just one or two parameters are selected for display that is just one or two of the values of parameters 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM are other than 100 NOT SELECTED the number and name of each displayed parameter are shown in addition to the value SIGNAL1 MIN 3402 Default Depends on the signal selected with par 3401 Range Defines the minimum expected value Display for the first display parameter value Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group P3407 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the P3402 P 3403 corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the Source value proper units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 D
263. l lt MIN FUNCTION Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 Sets a fault level for analog input 2 e See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results Note Disabling wiring fault ground fault may void the warranty ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected e Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT NOTE WIRING FAULT 3023 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE No response ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board Default O Range 0 5 Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME e If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped e Starting then requires a successful reset perfo
264. l operation Enter OPERATING ZERO RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp function generator input to zero 7 RESET O gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM OPERATING Not in use 10 Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ABB DRV Control word z 0 or reference z 0 Retain last Control word FULL and reference Control word 0 and reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference decceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM EXT1 SELECT 0 Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM 12 15 Not in use E 17 3 Status Word E 28 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 As described earlier the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 1 READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED FAULT No fault OFF2 inactive OFF2 ACTIVE OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBITED Switch on inhibit not active ALARM A
265. larm No alarm AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected External control location EXT1 selected EXT RUN No onto Run enable signal received ENABLE 0 Mo external Run enable received E 17 4 State diagram MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 29 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of Control word CW and Status word SW bits for the ABB drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 i OFF3 OFF2 e FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit 4 0 CW Bit7 1 ids T4 Fault From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 INPUT POWER OFF M SW Bit6 1 INHIBITED g SW Bit1 0 Pd ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 Ld AB CD NOT READY E TO SWITCH ON Y Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxx x1 xx xxxx x110 gt OPERATION READY TO
266. larms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green LED on the control panel if attached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS for the bit definitions e e overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or LOC V ALARM name in the Fault mode figures on the right Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The ALARM 2008 message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists PANEL LOSS 00 00 9 4 Alarm and Fault Indications A fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates an abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact your local Baldor District Office MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 1 To display the alarms on the keypad set parameter 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS to value 1 YES The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See Appendix E for Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
267. lation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 s 60 00 s Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes e f START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number ACCEL DECEL ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 2201 ACCELER TIME 1 2202 DECELER TIME 1 2203 RAMP SHAPE 1 2204 MN796 ACB530 Selection Value Parameter Name and Description Default 5 DI5 Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 DI2 DI6 De
268. lays The drive detects error situations and reports them using the green and red LED on the body of the drive e the status LED on the control panel if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to the drive e the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive e the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault 9 3 1 Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by e enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive e setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code in the Fault LOC amp FAULT mode figure on the right stopping the motor if it was on FAULT 7 The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the AI1 LOSS following keys removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP or DOWN key 00 00 The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active 9 3 2 Flashing green A
269. ldbus Motor speed 4 The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear shape is suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration deceleration gt t s 2 S curve shape is ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed 8 18 1 Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Sequence programming offers eight additional ramp times See section on Sequence programming 8 19 Critical speeds Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical speeds or speed bands 8 19 1 Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 8 20 Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if e torque control is active or PID reference is being followed or drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level 8 18 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 20 1 Settings Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed settings 1208 Constant speed 7 Used also for fault functions see group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS and for jogging function 8 21 Speed c
270. ldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller Lone in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 E 24 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 E 14 4 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus NEN 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus NEN 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay1 3status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay4 6status E 14 5 Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires e drive parameter values set as defined below e fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 1501 AO1 CONTENT SE
271. le for most applications In demanding applications a separate Motor Control Calculation can be performed 8 12 1 Settings Parameter 9910 Motor Control Calculation Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 15 Figure 8 1 Power Loss Ride Through Ud MM T hyh WAYN Hint THU aL YA YARD MM MN qu WII ll NM Wwe hm NA i RA Uinput power Tm fout Unc N m Hz Vdc Und 160 80 520 A at 120 60 390 80 40 260 40 20 130 0 0 0 tis 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 UDC Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout Output frequency of the drive TM Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fout 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy 8 18 1 Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 8 14 DC magnetizing When DC magnetizing is activated the drive auto
272. left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out Disconnect the fan cable Reinstall the fan in reverse order Restore power OOA 9 9 3 2 Frame size R5 To replace the fan Remove power from drive Remove the screws attaching the fan Remove the fan Swing the fan out on its hinges Disconnect the fan cable Reinstall the fan in reverse order Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow DARAN 9 9 3 3 Frame size R6 To replace the fan Remove power from the drive Remove the screw attaching the fan casing and let the casing lean down against the limiters Slide out the cable connector and disconnect it Take off the casing and replace the fan onto the casing s pins Reinstall the casing in reverse order Restore power aR wc MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 10 9 9 4 Internal Enclosure Cooling Fan IP54 UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure 9 9 4 1 Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the drive and R4 located in front of the drive 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs 4 When the clips barbs are free pull th
273. llation e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Gain K 1 T Integration time 0 T p Derivation time 0 Error value Controller output output l d Note You can use parameter Kp e l 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to b Controller e Error value t automatically set the proportional gain MN796 ACB530 Group SPEED CONTROL Continued Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value INTEGRATION TIME 2302 DERIVATION TIME 2303 ACC COMPENSATION 2304 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default 0 50 s Range 0 00 600 00 s Sets the integration time for the speed controller e A e The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant error value Kp e 4 e Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the K integration time is too short e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant i Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time Default 0 ms Range 0 10000 ms Controller output Gain K p 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value t gt Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive
274. lt indication is displayed 95 User limit f P 3011 Stall frequency ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME e An alarm indication is displayed e The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input Default 20 0 Hz Range 0 5 50 0 Hz This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to the figure Default 20 s Range 10 400 s This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function Default 1 ENABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT NOTE EARTH FAULT 3017 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 0 NOT SEL Range 0
275. lways show the constant value of 25 0 C MOT THERM STRESS Read Only 0153 Range 0 0 100 096 Estimated rise of the motor temperature Value equals to the estimated motor thermal stress as a percentage of the motor temperature trip level PID COMM VALUE 1 0158 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 PID COMM VALUE 2 0159 Read Only Range 32768 to 432767 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 SAVED KWH 0174 Read Only Range 0 0 999 9 kWh Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy econsumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time e See Group ENERGY SAVING 7 6 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value Group Parameter Name and Description OPERATING SAV
276. ly at the drive end 10 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table Use a tightening torque of 0 4N m 0 3lb ft 4 8 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 5 8 Power Connection Diagrams The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 through R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals Figure 4 9 R3 Terminal Layout J1 DIP switches for analog inputs two types can be used J1 J1 A m Diagram shows the R3 frame o gt Hilo Alt in voltage position Other frames have similar layouts 9 p Z AI2 in current position Panel connector X1 Analog inputs and outputs and 10 V ref voltage output IF X1 Digital inputs and 24 V aux voltage output B Lm X1 Relay outputs ll Power LED green TN Fault LED red J2 DIP switch for RS485 termination Optional module 1 J2 J2 i d 1 X1 Communications A 1 B f M RS485 A ON i a apes Us i nA ON ta f Optional module 2 off position on position y i UN ee Power output to motor Frame sizes Er VILAM PHS Se See S U2 V2 W2 R5 R6 differ er See EM3 next page EM1 II Er GND Optional braking Frame Terminal size labels R1 R2 B
277. matically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible break away torque up to 18096 of the motor nominal torque By adjusting the premagnetizing time it is possible to synchronize the motor start and eg a mechanical brake release The Automatic start feature and DC magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time 8 14 1 Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME 8 15 DC hold With the motor DC hold feature it is possible to lock the Motor speed rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the A DC hold motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed the lt drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold DC hold speed the normal drive operation resumes speed gt t s Speed reference y a 1 1 DC hold speed gt f s 8 15 1 Settings Parameters 2101 2106 8 16 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 16 Flux braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy Figure 8 1 Flux Braking Charts Motor speed TB o N A Tp Braking torque Tn 100 N m No Flux braking 60 Y 1 Flux braking 404 Flux a 20 No Flux braking gt t s 1 1
278. n Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the cooling fan see section Main fan replacement 3 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room 4 Reinstall the cooling fan 5 Restore power 9 9 3 Main fan replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from Baldor Do not use other than Baldor specified spare parts MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 9 9 9 3 1 Frame sizes R1 through R4 Frame sizes R1 through R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For frame size e R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift e R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the
279. n Default O NOT SEL Continued Range 0 2 NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function Motor 4 See the diagram speed Pehold RON Requires parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE z 1 OPEN VECTOR 71 AUT e Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below Ref 4 the value of parameter 2105 e When the reference rises above the level of DChold Ns T parameter 2105 the drive resumes speed e normal operation DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has stopped e f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed e f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold NOTE DC HOLD CTL 2104 can only be modified if the drive is stopped DC HOLD SPEED 2105 Default 5 RPM Range 0 360 RPM Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD DC CURR REF 2106 Default 3096 Range 0 10096 Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR DC BRAKE TIME 2107 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 250 0s Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING START INHIBIT 2108 Default 0 OFF Range 0 1
280. n Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module e Parameter 5101 is automatically configured e Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters e Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled e Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 23 E 14 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to e tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual suppli
281. n feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed Default 4 96 Range 0 127 Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 e See parameter 3405 for list of available units Parameter Descriptions 7 55 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number PROCESS PID UNIT SCALE 4007 SET 1 Continued 0 VALUE 4008 100 VALUE 4009 SET POINT SEL 4010 7 56 Parameter Descriptions Selection Value O O O N O Aa ook 12 14 15 16 17 19 Parameter Name and Description Default 1 Range 0 4 Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values e Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right end of the entry e See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 o ow 3 7 Default 0 0 Range Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 4007 096 VALUE Units P4006 Defines together with the next cale PA 1000 0 parameter the scaling applied to aoo deeem nene U the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 Nr and 0132 P4008 aa e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 1000 0 1 0 100 Internal scale REG BYPASS CTRL
282. n power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACB530 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 through RO3 When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EMG F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals The ACB530 01 U1 is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfuctioning drive contact your local Baldor representative for replacement The ACB530 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on The heat sink may reach a high temperature See informtion on Technical data Note When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the keypad will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the keypad first press the LOC REM key 1 9 Terms and Abbreviations Term abbreviation Explanation ACB CP BA Assistant keypad advanced operator keypad for 1 4 communication with the drive Brake chopper Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate circuit of the drive to the brake resistor when necessary The chopper operates when the DC link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit The voltage rise is typically caused by deceleration
283. n the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current e See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode V F CONTROL mode only e Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE NOTE START FUNCTION 2101 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 1 COAST Range 1 2 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active Selects the motor stop method Default 0 30 s Range 0 00 10 00 s Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode e After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor e Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value START STOP DC HOLD CTL 2104 Group Parameter Name and Descriptio
284. ng 3 1 5 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level e P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles e P54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions f for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood see the note in chapter Technical data MN796 ACB530 Installing the Drive 3 1 3 1 6 Confirm that the mounting location meets the following guidelines The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above For horizontal installation contact your local Baldor District Office for more information e The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see section Dimensions and Weights plus air flow space around the drive see section Watts Loss below The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See section Motor connection specifications The mounting site must support the drive s weight See section Weight 3 2 Tools Required To install the drive you need the following tools screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware u
285. ng IP21 4 5 5 Wiring IP21 4 5 6 Wiring IP54 4 5 7 Wiring IP54 UL Type 1 Enclosure with Cables llle UL Type 1 Enclosure with Conduit ooooooooococrnrcanran UL Type 12 Enclosure with Cables ooooooooocrrnrorarann es UL Type 12 Enclosure with Conduit oooooocoococorcno eee 4 5 8 Power Connection Diagrams o oooooocrrr e eh 4 5 9 Disconnecting the Internal EMC Filter llle IIIA 4 6 Drive s Power Connection Terminals leeeeeeeee e 4 6 1 Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size o ooooooooooccrrnn 4 0 2 Crmp On Ring Eugs 2 it ded x eR poU don er BOR e Rota Ed qma Rose dira 4 6 3 Screw On Terminal LUS sisse oe sen goede e ROLE X RP VERE X REI 4 7 Input Power Connections mk de Rc rr rr Rx we XR Ro Rando a ERR Rec 4 7 1 Input Power Specifications 0 0 0 a 4 7 2 Input Power Cables Wiring eee e RR I I unn 4 8 Brake Components 4 8 1 Compatibility 4 8 2 Selecting the 4 8 3 Symbols 4 8 4 Installing and Braking Resistors Frame Sizes R1 and R2 0 0000 eee Wiring RESISTOMNS a soi a a ea Raabe el Raw pad dee e 4 8 5 Mandatory Circuit Protection 0 0 cette 4 8 6 Parameter Set Upis usse paa rada C I IG e NAME RE ERR A ai 4 9 Motor Connections 4 9 1 Motor Connection Specifications sses ias esi e nner rae ep nat a nn 4 9 2 Motor Cable Lengths amp nbi x A a e lar e e a 4 9 3 Motor Thermal Protection carer sas csi la aen ac
286. not visible scroll the lines with keys CAD and Y f EXIT LOC S After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing 7 01 Nd M TA 19 03 FB ACTUAL SI GNALS 04 FAULT HI STORY 10 STARI RUE DLR EXIT 00 00 SEL 6 4 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 4 3 How to Find out the Panel Version EJE Display a If the power is switched on switch it off Po Keep key C2 pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following keypad information PANEL VERSI ON I NFO Panel SW keypad firmware version dd DOXA ROM CRC keypad ROM check sum FI ash Rev X XX Flash Rev flash content version di id Flash content comment When you release the key the panel goes to the Output mode 6 2 4 4 How to Start Stop and Switch Between Local and Remote Control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control MEM To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local control LOC shown on the status line press Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the keypad press The result
287. ny measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions must be followed 9 7 3 Correcting faults The recommended corrective action for faults is Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Reset the drive See section Fault resetting MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 4 9 7 3 1 Fault listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for Assistant Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Table 9 1 Fault Listing cu 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load e Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct e Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply e Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER T
288. ode Connection Example X1 1 10kohm 41 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AI External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Na 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 44447 JAO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA Lj 9 AGND Analog output circuit common L 4 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A ra Default operation Note 1 Code 21RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Ax Default operation DIS Di4 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 0 O Reference through Al 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 O CONST SPEED T0020 26 RO3A A Default operation o 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 2225 c
289. of the 9802 COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter protocol automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocal ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a unique value for Defines the station ID address of the RS485 link No two this parameter stations on the line may have the same address When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 NOTE For a new address to take effect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to O before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the default value for Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in this parameter is 9 6 kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 2 4 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 115 2kbit s 4 8 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the default value for Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used this parameter is 1 with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 2 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 2 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 2 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the default value for Selects the communication profile used by th
290. oltage 24V Thus the output signal must be 4 20mA not 0 20mA Figure 5 12 Three Wire Sensor Transmitter X1 control board OUT 0 4 20mA 5 Al2 Process actual value measurement 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA R j 100 ohm X1 control board 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 11 GND 24V DC 250mA MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 11 5 6 Operating Mode Default Values for Parameters Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list Changing from the default operating mode ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following table Table 5 4 Motor ABB 2 Wire ABB 3 Wire Baldor 2 Wire Potentiometer Hand Auto PID Control 9902 Operating Mode t ABB2 WIRE 2 ABB3 WIRE 3 PALDOR 4 MOTORPOT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL p E 1 OPEN 1 OPEN 1 OPEN 9904 Control Type 2 V F CONTROL 1 OPEN VECTOR ZSE Va VECTOR 1 OPEN VECTOR 103 0103 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL OUTPUT FREQ 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED Goo RUN ENABLE _ o NOTSEL__ o NoTSeL__ o pe fe b j4 p szos 103 0103 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM OUTPUT FREQ 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 102 0102 SPEED 103 0103 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM OUTPUT FREQ 102 0102 SPEED 102
291. on EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution C 2 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 305 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below C 2 1 First environment drives of category C2 The internal EMC filter is connected The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 284 for the frame size and switching frequency in use ad eS WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required C 2 2 Second environment drives of category C3 The internal EMC filter is connected The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual The drive is installed according to th
292. on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off e Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive e Disconnect the internal EMC fi Iter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive e Note When the internal EMC fi Iter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible without an external fi Iter e Disconnect the internal EMC fi Iter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged Note When the internal EMC fi Iter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible without an external filter e All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note e Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and BRK and BRK Before installation and maintenance work on the drive
293. onductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is 5096 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield Shield AF SR and shield ES e PE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE 8 C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm C 3 3 Effective motor cable shields The general rule for cable shield effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s shield the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2 Ld Braided metallic shield L3 C 2 CE Guidelines ACB530 MN796 C 3 4 EN 61800 3 compliant motor cables The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules e Motor cables must have an effective shield as described in section Effective motor cable shields e Motor cable shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle pig tail the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive e At the motor end the motor cable shield must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the shield wires mu
294. oneously declared if the input power is a deltaground ed System and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software SW e Internal fault e The loaded software is not compatible with the drive e Call support representative CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 C Check for and correct e Excessive ambient temperature e Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local Baldor representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local Baldor representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel e panel that supports drive X but not the ACB530 DRIVE TYPE has been connected to the ACB530 ACB530 SUPPORTED DRIVES X Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault Fault name in D ription and r mmen rrectiv tion code panel escription and reco ended corrective actio 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is out
295. onnected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault 2 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current 2 AT 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 2 p gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or Runenable DI6 Relay output 3 Fault 1 Jl E Jo Al1 0 10 V 107 Al2 0 4 20 mA MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 7 5 4 4 Motor Potentiometer Operating Mode This operating mode provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Figure 5 8 Motor Potentiometer Operating Mode Connection Example X1 1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAN Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 A Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA L719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 4112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 ID Start stop Activation starts the drive
296. onnections WARNING Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors WARNING Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage WARNING Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive 4 16 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 9 1 Motor Connection Specifications Table 4 1 Motor Connection Specifications Voltage U 0 U 3 phase symmetrical U a at the field weakening point 0 500 Hz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Field Weakening Point 10 500 Hz Switching Frequency Selectable See the availability in the table below Pt ands kHz KHZ 208 240V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 in scalar control mode Frame sizes R1 R4 except ACB530 01 097A 4 380 480V All types in scalar control mode 500 600V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 in scalar control mode Cable Temperature Rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum Motor Cable Length See section Motor Cable Lengths 4 9 2 Motor Cable Lengths Maximum motor cable lengths for 460V and 600V drives are given in the sections below In multimotor systems the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not e
297. ons n multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification e f the nominal motor current is less than 20 of the nominal output current of the drive e When the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected The V F control mode is not recommended for permanent magnet synchronous motors In the V F control mode some standard features are not available 8 22 1 Settings Parameter 9904 CONTROL TYPE IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is V F When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low IR compensation speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require high breakaway torque In vector control no IR Motor voltage compensation is possible needed cu Np compensation f HZ Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Programmable protection functions 8 23 1 Al lt Min Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit 8 23 2 Settings Parameters 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 8 23 3 Panel loss Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the keypad selected as the control location for the drive stops communicating 8 20 Start Up
298. ontroller tuning It is possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN In Autotune run the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1 to 20 Figure 8 2 Speed Controller Tuning A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration Proportional integral Speed reference reference Derivative Calculated actual speed MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 19 8 22 8 23 NOTE The speed controller can be used in vector control ie when 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ 8 21 1 Settings Parameter groups 23 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS 8 21 2 Diagnostics Actual signal 0102 SPEED V F control It is possible to select V F control as the motor control method instead of vector control In the V F control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference It is recommended to activate the V F control mode in the following special applicati
299. or Read Only Range 0 0 150 0 C The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius Read Only Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 Read Only Range 0 0 100 096 0 0 600 096 for torque External reference REF2 in 96 Parameter Descriptions 7 3 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value OPERATING CTRL LOCATION 0113 DATA Continuea Group RUN TIME R 0114 KWH COUNTER 0115 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0116 DI 1 3 STATUS 0118 DI 4 6 STATUS 0119 Al 1 0120 Al 2 0121 RO 1 3 STATUS 0122 AO 1 0124 AO 2 0125 7 4 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Read Only Range 0 2 LOCAL EXT1 EXT2 Active control location Read Only Range 0 9999 h The drive s accumulated running time in hours h e Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode Read Only Range 0 65535 kWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from O Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode Read Only Range 0 0 100 096 0 0 600 096 for torque Applic
300. ot be reset Read Only Range 0 65535 MWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours e The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from O Cannot be reset Read Only Range 0 65535 Mrev The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode Parameter Descriptions 7 5 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value OPERATING DRIVE ON TIME HI 0143 Read Only DATA Range 0 65535 days Group Parameter Name and Description Continued The drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset DRIVE ON TIME LO 0144 Read Only Range 00 00 00 23 59 58 The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds e Shown in format hh mm ss Cannot be reset Read Only MOTOR TEMP 0145 Range Par 3501 1 to 3 10 to 200 C Par 3501 4 O to 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 to 6 0 to 1 Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up e See parameter 3501 CB TEMP 0150 Read Only Range 20 0 to 150 0 C Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives a
301. otection level needs to be 11596 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 9196 115 127 100 ZERO SPEED LOAD 3008 Default 7096 Range 25 15096 Output current relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed e Value is relative to 906 MOTOR NOM CURR BREAK POINT FREQ Default 35 Hz 3009 Range 1 250 Hz Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values 3 0 60s ly Output current 25 1 90s L Nomi N Nominal motor current 20 4 fo Output frequency E 180 s fgrk Break point frequency 15 300s A Trip time E 600 s co A lo 354 QN fo fark 0 02 04 06 0 8 1 0 1 2 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 41 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value FAULT STALL FUNCTION 3010 FUNCTIONS Continued Group STALL FREQUENCY 3011 STALL TIME 3012 EARTH FAULT 3017 COMM FAULT FUNC 8018 7 42 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 0 NOT SEL Range 0 2 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used FAULT When the drive operates Torque 4 in the stall region for the time set Current ES by 3012 STALL TIME The drive coasts to stop Stall region e A fau
302. parity one stop bit 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value PANEL COMM FRAME ERRORS 5206 Continued Group BUFFER OVERRUNS 5207 CRC ERRORS 5208 EFB EFB PROTOCOL ID 5301 PROTOCOL EFB STATION ID 5302 EFB BAUD RATE 5303 EFB PARITY 5304 EFB CTRL PROFILE 5305 EFB OK MESSAGES 5306 MN796 ACB530 Parameter Name and Description Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check e Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors Default READ ONLY Range Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest poss
303. press CZ MN796 ACB530 Display LOC u MAIN MENU DA RAMETER CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC U PAR GROUPS Q 01 OPERATI NG DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SI GNAL 04 FAULT HI SM n START STOP DI REFERENCE SELECT E T 00 00 SEL LOC _ amp PAR GROUPS 99 10 START STOP DI R EX T 00 00 SEL LOC UY PARAMETERS APPLI C MACRI 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT OC U PARAMETERS 5901 LANGUAGE 90 ADE STANDARD e 9905 MOTOR NOM_VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR ED T 9902 APPLI C MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UY PAR ED T 9902 APPLIC REO 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC uy PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 000 APP MACRO 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Using the Keypad 6 7 6 2 6 2 How to Select the Monitored Signals You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group PANEL DISPLAY parameters See detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 Operating Mode For operating modes whose default value of parameter 9904 Control Type is 1 Open Vector the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are al
304. prior to the pulse in DI1 e Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel e Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST DI6 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DIG activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward KEYPAD Control Panel e Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST Parameter Descriptions 7 11 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value START STOP EXT1 COMMANDS 1001 DIR Continued Group Parameter Name and Description Default 2 DI1 2 Range 0 10 Continued DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations e
305. product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives A 2 1 1 Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Refer to Appendix C for information A 2 2 C Tick Marking The drive carries C Tick marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products A 2 2 1 Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Refer to Appendix C for information A 2 Technical Specifications MN796 ACB530 A 2 3 UL CSA markings Q An UL mark is attached to ACB530 drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of UL Cc us 508C LISTED A CSA mark is attached to ACB530 U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions SP of C22 2 NO 14 The ACB530 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA RMS symmetrical
306. r See parameter 3407 Default 0 NONE Range 0 6 NONE 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor e Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor e The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor e The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 PTC Sensor configuration uses one PTC The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases Excessive sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it Normal into ohms The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance as a function of the motor operating temperature Lone x m lt 15 kohm MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Group Parameter Number MOTOR TEMP SENSOR TYPE 3501 MEAS Continued Continued INPUT SELECTION 3502 ALARM LIMIT 3503 FAULT LIMIT 3504 MN796 ACB530 Selection Val
307. r ACT1 Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 POWER Uses power for ACT1 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM NOTE ACT1 INPUT 4016 can only be modified if the drive is stopped ACT2 INPUT 4017 Default 2 Al2 Range 1 7 Ali Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 POWER Uses power for ACT2 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM NOTE ACT2 INPUT 4017 can only be modified if the drive is stopped ACT1 MINIMUM 4018 Default 096 Range 1000 to 100096 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 e Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 91 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 7 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done POT Par 4016 Source Source min Source max Source min Source max Si i d 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 cid p ACT 1 4 B HoE 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 M
308. r values can exceed RMAX The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods Figure 4 13 A Braking ON Time Braking OFF i i i gt ON time OFF time ra 4 ON time a Cycle time E Duty cycle Cycle time the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Figure 4 14 Deceleration curve Overhauling load Avg braking power curve overhauling load Avg braking power T during deceleration Time tozero Power 4 Temperature P A The many variables in the last requirement abov
309. ram ref Frequency reference 4014 Speed reference 4021 errVinv Al Al2 oh1 IMOT ref 4010 8 24 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process controller PID1 Local ref switch 1101 1102 Panel ref1 Limiter 1107 Switch PID1 Out Vi 1106 Limiter P1 1106 Group 40 E a Panel ref2 MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 25 8 30 2 Settings 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Groups 40 PROCESS PID PID1 settings SET 1 8 30 3 Diagnostics 8 31 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active Select noat NOT SEIH 5 d INTERNAL K Motor D dada 4022 Set Reset Hs 9904 refActive 1 uid MODE PL PIDCtriActive SIR modulating R Or 5320 B1 lt 1 q 5320 B2 7 Compare Select Or 013271 NOT seL 27 1 gt 2 INTERNAL StatRq4 1 4025 312 DI1 d 4022 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping Motor speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The 96 reference EXT REF2 is in use See
310. recting faults 3 coro er toe aid od eoe Male aeos e titur e d nar aede eaten RE d Red 9 4 9 8 Embedded Fieldbus Faults spos esati nani ronen rb a A RERO a ER RDR ACER E RR AR e 9 8 9 8 1 No Master Device scele bees a VR OL PERECRET Gd 9 8 9 8 2 Same Device Addiess c ok kg A plas AGRAR RR RR e 9 8 9 8 3 Incorrect Wiring sucre A RUP ead EUR nne 9 8 9 9 Maintenance nos o 9 9 9 91 Maintenance Intervals a2 ici nnn Re bla EUR Ere e ae 9 9 99 2 Heatsink conocia PL ED 9 9 9 93 Main Tan replacement cuicos ia ti te 9 9 9 9 4 Internal Enclosure Cooling FAN ooocooocooco I Ih 9 11 9 9 5 Capacitors CPC a eae aioe Gre eae Pa ae ae eam eae 9 12 9 9 6 Power Connections 3 426044 ER Riiie et IL TE el eee eed boi dires eds 9 12 EROVAL CLP 9 12 Appendix A Technical Specifications n WNESCADELOIE MC A 1 A 1 1 Design and Test Standards sis eee hr a he A 1 A 1 2 Environmental Test Standards ioc scri cur cineris e nen A 1 A2 Applicable standards prr IIR RR ERR Re ra hoe dee A Rees A 1 A 2 1 CE Marking tance oett petet ote iso E aE oa e d eu FR ded ete Rac RE ee RU A 2 A 2 2 C Tick Markion x eode A il eek dea A 2 A 2 3 UL CSAMArKINGS zs caer dus ect a td Wr RR X Jede io E A 3 A 38 Ambient Conditions sii a abba ire inne RP ae E easier dee eck dc Rods A 3 A4 MatetialS 22i A A KI be te eee ERRAT CH BOTE Qr b we A 4 ALDUEMICIONOY viii A AA AAA A ARI RA Re dca A 4 MN796 ACB530 A2 Design and Test Standard
311. rection below Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below PID1OUT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group PROCESS PID SET 2 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source e A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 19 PID 1 I REF 2 LIMIT i If PFC is used SELECT y MAX 1107 1108 i e 1 17 20 21 gt MIN 1107 1108 NOTE REF2 SELECT 1106 can only be modified if the drive is stopped MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 17 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continue
312. rify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with highcapacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non runningtests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is notrunning use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to allground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty OBSOLETE THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local Baldor representative OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact your local Baldor representative OPEX PWR Internal fault Exceptionally low voltage detected on the OINT power supply Contact your local Baldor representative CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local Baldor representative SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase e Blown fuse OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 12096 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct e Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 Adequacy of motor braking torque Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor DRIVE ID Internal fault Configura
313. rive is started and stopped with push buttons Baldor 2 wire Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used The speed is controlled by potentiometer two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchanged Hand Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved for one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use PID control Process control applications for example different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control 5 4 1 ABB 2 Wire Operating Mode This is the default operating mode It provides a general purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are the default values defined in section Complete parameter list Figure 5 5 ABB 2 Wire Operating Mode Connection Example
314. rmed from the control panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred in the trial time The last is reset only if the value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or more Trial time f Time x XA gt x Automatic reset Default 30 0 s Range 1 0 600 0 s Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets e See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 120 0s Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart e f DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately Parameter Descriptions 7 43 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value AUTOMATIC AR OVERCURRENT 3104 Default 0 DISABLE RESET Range 0 1 Group Parameter Name and Description Continued O DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off AR OVERVOLTAGE 3105 Default O DISABLE Range 0 1 DISABLE Disables automatic reset ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off AR UNDERVO
315. rnal Run enable received E Not in use DCU Profile The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile DCU profile Status word parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Bit Name Value OCS ______ E READY 0 jDrveismotready OOOO ENABLED ES 0 NoextemalRunenablesignalreceived STARTED O Drivehasnotreceivedstartcommand O 3 RUNNING i 0 Driveis notmodulating o O ZERO SPEED 0 Drivehasnotreached zero speed __________ 5 ACCELERATE iai 0 Driveis notaccelerating ooo i DECELERATE 0 Driveisnotdecelerating 7 AT SETPOINT Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value ie is within tolerance limits 0 Drive has not reached setpoint I 14 Operation is limited by internal protection limits or group 20 LIMITS settings MEN Operation is within internal protection limits and according group 20 LIMITS settings Nu ERE supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is EN its limits peas REF ra a OA 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Driveis running in reverse direction ir O Driveis running in forward direction Cd PANEL LOCAL Control is in keypad or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in keypad local mode FIELDBUS LOCAL 0 Controlis notin fieldbus local mode CdS EXT2_ACT ER 0 ControlisinEXT1 mode 0 FAULT O jiODrieisnotinafaultstate MN796
316. rs 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR e Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 e REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 5 Fault Fault name in a cada panel Description and recommended corrective action ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct e Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load e Insufficient motor power e Parameters 3010 3012 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring e Ve
317. rug xav nee Rubia AUR ER RUN ede A Y Bale e PURI E Rote D 1 Appendix E Embedded Fieldbus E 1 What This Chapter Contains sico hpc rk EORR DR RR CER a EORR RUE IRR RR e E 1 EZ OVetvieW sce E UID A erede trt A WD exe eer ted E 1 E 2 1 Control Interface dac user eeu eae rad ap Iq S bead aes REED E 1 ES Planning 4 td bi tige dee a e da E 1 E 4 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB ooococcococconoooor e E 2 E 5 Communication Set Up e EFB 4 52 oul emcee een oan RUE der xo depre Esa d dae Rr e rice E 3 E 5 1 Serial Communication Selection 00 00 cee ee E 3 E 5 2 Serial Communication Configuration s s ias sasea secre dian n E 3 E 6 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB occocccccocccco en E 3 E 6 1 Controlling the Drive uia ree rb do RR A EORR ene ees E 3 E 6 2 Start Stop Direction Control susce rire se pRRX e REOS Re Re PREX e e eas E 4 E 6 3 Input Reference Selection o ooooooccccocoocr eee E 4 E 6 4 Miscellaneous Drive Control oooccccocoocoor hs E 4 E 6 5 Relay Output Control 2 2 aci drunk a thud ae died Pha aa deor ded a E 5 E 6 6 Analog O tp t Controls dic ire cn Rai t RR Ke Ke t T US d eR D Ea E 5 E 6 7 PID Control Setpolnt SoUfCe uoi exe e A edu edidere o A y age e qu du E 5 MN796 ACB530 vii E 6 8 Communication F l sceri sss daa a Eck ENE a See A OR a E 6 E7 Information from the Drive EFB cir o a Eb Pese Re E E E 6 E 7 1 Pre defined FeedbaCk iiiiioiuss lu ta ed
318. rview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector 1 Mounting procedure Ss ss TA Note Install the input power and motor cables first 2 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp X00301 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector Derrmifermtimmm rx 6 Tighten the cable clamp le x A 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the protocol specific documentation provided with the module X00302 E 18 Communication Set up FBA Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuratio
319. s BR 100 00 MENU LOC UMA N MENU el To do other tasks go first to the Main menu PARANEE and select the appropriate mode on the menu CHANGED PAR The status line see section Status line shows the name of the current menu mode item or state MN796 ACB530 EXIT 00 00 ENTER Using the Keypad 6 3 6 2 4 1 How to do Common Tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Pre mes Stn How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets with assistants Assistants 6 2 7 1 How to view and edit changed parameters Changed parameters 6 2 8 1 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault Chapter 9 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to Time and date 6 2 10 1 the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the keypad Parameter backup 6 2 11 1 How to restore parameters from the keypad to the drive Parameter backup How to view backup information Parameter backup EXE 2 11 2 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals I O settings 6 2 12 1 6 2 4 2 How to Get Help 2 Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display If the whole text is
320. s Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque reference ramp times Group 32 SUPERVISION 8 6 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference processing chain 8 7 Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted 8 7 1 Settings Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Al as PID process control reference or actual value source 42 EXT TRIM PID 8 7 2 Diagnostics CI Al LOSS AI2 LOSS Al1 AI2 signal below limit 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Al1 LOSS AI2 LOSS AI1 AI2 signal below limit 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT PAR AI SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 8 8 Programmable analog output Two programmable current outputs 0 4 20 mA are available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 13 8 8 1 Settings Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 8 8 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 AO 1 value 0125 AO 2
321. s s ii a e t ae e d D ida Bia a RR oa A 4 A 3 Identifying the Drive by Model Number 2 2 0 ce eee eet eee eee A 5 AA Storage G ldelln8s 23 3 rar ii teed Kc an os dr ed dada hee a A 6 A 5 VS1GV Drive Ratings Model Numbers and Frame SizeS 0000 0c eee eee A 6 A 6 VS1GV Terminal Wire Gauge Specifications clie A 10 A 7 Drive Dimensions and Weights o oooooocooooorren eee I n A 12 Appendix B Parameter Tables B 1 Parameter Settings by Group aurou ra o e ced Roni dd Dead eee O B 1 Appendix C CE Guidelines C 1 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Defi nitions 0 0 RII IIR C 1 C 2 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 0 0 cece e n C 1 C 2 1 First environment drives of category C2 0 eee C 1 C 2 2 Second environment drives of category CB ooocccccccccoco eee C 1 C 3 Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance 0 00 00 cece C 1 C 3 1 Minimum requirement CE amp C TICK sesi erari cee IIIA C 1 C 3 2 Recommendation for conductor layout lisse nes C 2 C 3 3 Effective motor cable shieldS 00 cee ee teen ee C 2 C 3 4 EN 61800 3 compliant motor CableS oocoocooocooocrr ne C 3 C 4 Product protection in the USA oo oooooocoorcnernor eee nn C 4 Appendix D Options and Kits D 1 Options and Kits for the ACB530 eiu aroi esdan ee RA Em ER RR n D 1 D 2 Optional Equipment and Accessories lille n D 1 D 2 1 Options iue ded gez ec B
322. s for R8 and 4 kHz a 300 m 980 ft cable cannot be used even with a du at filter A sine filter must be used and the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are ment with a 300 m 980 ft cable Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m 980 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements 4 9 2 2 Motor Cable Length for 600V Drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with different switching frequencies As the 600V drives are not CE approved cable lengths for EMC limits are not given Table 4 3 Maximum Cable Length for 600V Drives BasicUnit e 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz Cm oft mm R2 100 3 100 390 Ra R4 200 60 10 390 Re 300 980 150 499 12 kHz switching frequency is not available WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive 4 9 3 Motor Thermal Protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against
323. s parameter set as shown in steps 4 and Do you want t to 5 below The Start up assistant then asks if you want to continue with the next Appi Cari a set up assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys 43 and and press If you choose to skip the Start up assistant asks the same question ip about the next assistant and so on 00 00 OK e To specify a new value press keys and ilie uh 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 240 V 1 CANCEL 00 00 _ SAVE C UHELP as given on the To ask for information on the requested parameter press key Scroll the help E US P i et im m text with keys a and y 2 Close the help by pressing Ss ait nd to motor onnection To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter press REM T PAR EDIT b wh 9906 MOTOR RATED AMPS e To stop the assistant press EX m A 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE MN796 ACB530 Using the Keypad 6 9 The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 Operating Mode the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name o Description Set Parameters Language Selecting the language 9901 Select Motor Set Up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are not in the 9910 allowed range Setting the limits
324. s the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 Default 300 Range 0 60096 Group Parameter Name and Description Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point LOAD FREQ 5 3716 Default 500 Hz Range 0 500 Hz Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point LOAD TORQ LOW 5 3717 Default 3096 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 Default 300 Range 0 60096 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point PROCESS PID GAIN 4001 Default 1 0 SET 1 Range 0 1 100 0 Defines the PID controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure nitially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 s
325. s the two s complement of the corresponding positive value scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 207 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACB530 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Code Name Meaning ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command ILLEGAL DATA The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined ADDRESS parameter group Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACB530 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 13 E 10 ABB control profiles technical data E 10 1 Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available via FBA modules Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available e ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives e ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as
326. screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter Using an EMC filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the drive 4 5 Wiring Overview 4 5 1 Conduit Gland Kit Wiring drives with the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items conduit gland box e screws e Cover The kit is included with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 3 4 5 2 Wiring Requirements WARNING Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACB530 The drive must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in section Preparing for Installation If in doubt contact your local Baldor District Office As you install the wiring observe the following e There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for each combination of drive enclosure type IP21 UL type and IP54 UL type 12 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance Appendix C In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to
327. sed wire stripper tape measure drill if the drive will be installed with screws bolts mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see Section Prepare to Mount the Drive 3 3 Watts Loss Data Table 3 2 Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space above and below the ACB530 drive 200mm 8 in Requirement Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACB530 drives can be mounted side by side Table 3 3 Air Flow 208 240V Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240V drives ts AcBso Ur Framesize ow em m ome m o m a u Im m 86 86 280 80 80 ua 8 05 wex2 gt 05 mn o 86 05 R6 05 248A 2 81 2 2 4 4 4 i 3 2 Installing the Drive MN796 ACB530 Table 3 4 Air Flow 380 480V Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480V drives Heat Loss ACB530 U1 04A1 4 05A4 4 06A9 4 08A8 4 012A 4 015A 4 023A 4 031A 4 038A 4 045A 4 059A 4 072A 4 078A 4 087A 4 097A 4 125A 4 157A 4 180A 4 195A 4 246A 4 290A 4 bloli aa aja dais as a RI 2 9 398 494 ser 792 Table 3 5 Air Flow 500 600V Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600V drives e Heat Loss MN796 ACB530
328. seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 Dl activated Dii DI2 D3 Function 0 1 1 _ Constantspeed1 1202 1 o 1 Constatspeed2 1203 o o 1 Constant speed 1204 3 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 0 1 0 Constantspeed5 1206 1 o o Constantspeed6 1207 6 9 9 Constant speed 7 1208 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code MN796 ACB530 Parameter Descriptions 7 19 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value CONSTANT CONST SPEED SEL 1201 SPEEDS Continuea Continued Group 14 CONST SPEED 1 1202 CONST SPEED 2 1203 CONST SPEED 3 1204 CONST SPEED 4 1205 CONST SPEED 5 1206 CONST SPEED 6 1207 CONST SPEED 7 1208 ANALOG MINIMUM Al1 1301 INPUTS 7 20 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 9 Range 14 to 19 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction NOTE CONST SPEED SEL 1201 can only be modified if the drive is stopped Default 6 0 Hz 360 RPM Range 0 0 5
329. side proper range gt 50 e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1301 MINIMUM Al1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM AI e 1304 MINIMUM Al2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1504 MINIMUM AO1 gt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 e 1510 MINIMUM AO2 gt 1511 MAXIMUM AC2 MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 7 Fault Fault name in D ription and r mmen rrectiv tion code panel escription and reco ended corrective actio 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 PN lt 3 0 where PN 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or PN 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in US 1007 PAR FIELDBUS Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct MISSING A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1
330. source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below Parameter Descriptions 7 14 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value Parameter Name and Description REFERENCE REF1 SELECT 1103 Default 1 SELECT Continuea Range 0 17 20 21 Continued Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not
331. ss NO select Show clock Hide clock and press or if you want to return to the EXIT previous display without making changes press EF To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press N changes To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press C and ox EL select a suitable format Press t to cancel your changes To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press Specify the hours with keys CA gt and Y2 and press Then specify the minutes Press y to save or to cancel your changes To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press Specify the first part of the date ad or month depending on the selected date format with keys A and and press Repeat for the second part After To cancel your changes press PF To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press AS Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed Scroll the help text with keys 4 and Y To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press To enable automatic clock transitions select the gountry or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press N To return to the previous display w
332. ssistant on next drive start up REM amp CHOICE Show start up assistant on next boot NO EXIT 00 00 OK 8 1 3 2 SELECTING THE LANGUAGE O If you run the Start up assistant the display then asks you to select the language REM OPAR EDIT Scroll to the desired language with keys sans wand press E wj to accept 9901 LANGUAGE If you press e the Start up assistant is stopped ENGLISH 0 EXIT 00 00 SAVE MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 5 8 1 3 3 STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP O The Start up assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the REM T PAR EDIT motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys 4 v and press Ew to accept and continue with the Start up assistant v EXIT 00 00 SAVE Note At any time if you press lw d the Start up assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode O The basic startup is now complete To continue setup with another Assistant please select the desired Assistant from the menu now showing on the keypad and press 8 1 3 4 DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION O Press to switch to local control LOC shown on the left e f the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing e f you are not in the Output mode press gt repeatedly un
333. st be twisted together into a bundle pigtail not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor e See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives columns EMC limits to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V drives for IEC EN 61800 3 compliance WARNING Do not use RFI EMC filters on IT systems C 4 Product protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 612 604 6 094 364 6 252 436 6 370 049 6 600 290 6 922 883 6 972 976 7 023 160 7 067 997 7 164 562 7 245 197 7 280 938 7 388 765 D512 026 D548 182S 5 301 085 5 654 624 6 147 887 6 265 724 6 396 236 6 741 059 6 940 253 6 977 449 7 034 510 7 082 374 7 176 779 7 250 739 7 330 095 D503 931 D512 696 D548 183S Other patents pending MN796 ACB530 5 463 302 5 799 805 6 175 256 6 305 464 6 448 735 6 774 758 6 934 169 6 984 958 7 036 223 7 084 604 7 190 599 7 262 577 7 349 814 D510 319 D521 466 5 521 483 5 940 286 6 184 740 6 313 599 6 498 452 6 844 794 6 956 352 6 985 371 7 045 987 7 098 623 7 215 099 7 271 505 7 352 220 D510 320 D541 743S 5 532 568 5 942 874 6 195 274 6 316 896 6 552 510 6 856 502 6 958 923 6 992 908 7 057 908 7 102 325 7 221 152 7 274 573 7 365 622 D511 137 D541 744S 5 589 54 5 952 613 6 229 356 6 335 607 6 597 148 6 859 374 6 967 453 6 999 329 7 059 390 7 109 780
334. ster shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACB530 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function Code Read 3xxxx input status E 9 2 4 4xxxx Register mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus register Access information O 40001 Control word R W Maps directly to the profile S CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 R W 40003 Reference 2 Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 Status word Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual
335. supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 e See Group SUPERVISION SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 e See Group SUPERVISION Parameter Descriptions 7 21 Group Parameter Number RELAY RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 OUTPUTS Continued Continued 7 22 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Selection Value 11 12 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 33 Parameter Name and Description Default 1 Range 0 36 46 47 52 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 e See Group SUPERVISION SUPRVS OVER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 e See Group SUPERVISION SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 e See Group SUPERVISION AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay e See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected CONST FREQ Energize relay when a const
336. t down to the drives 3 What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 1 E 4 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive Terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications e Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus as indicated in Figure E 1 below e To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See figure E 1 Figure E 1 Installation Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 00000 P i
337. t the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING e To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check e Digital input configuration e Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED 2027 USERLOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C CURVE MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relayoutput 9 6 Fault History When a fault is detected it is stored in the fault history The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The assistant keypad provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault logger mode for more information 9 7 Diagnostics WARNING Do not attempt a
338. t0 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xoox x1xx xxxx x111 LA B C D CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 cD ENABLED SWBIZ A C CW Bit5 0 CW2oox x1xx xxx1 1111 L Le Bit 4 1 KEY RFG OUTPUT State D ENABLED saa Path described in example PP CWz oox x1xx xx 11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD L i e Bit 521 SW STATUS WORD RFG ACCELERATOR RFG Ramp Function Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT C A f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CWooox x1xx x111 1111 i e Bit 671 n Speed E Indicates the features not in ABB ORV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input D lt MN796 ACB530 Fieldbus Communications E 19 E 10 5 Reference scaling ABB Drives and DCU profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference puerco mango eg ao mmm REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 1104 1105 Actual 32767 frequency 0 0 20000 par 1105 motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 20000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 1107 1108 Actual 32767 frequency 0 0 10000 par 1108 motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 10000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque 1 or 0 0 10000
339. tarts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 118 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A rx Default operation Note 1 Code 21lRO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 c open C connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A x Default operation DI4 DIS Output 24 RO2B L Running gt 22 connected to 24 0 O Reference through Al 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 O const SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A X Default operation O 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B L Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed 31 Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Analog output AO2 Current 9 gt Al1 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI4 5 Relay output 1 Ready 2 p gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running On e Relay output 3 Fault 1 Jig ET go AIt 0 10 V v 207 AI2 0 4 20 mA 5 6 Control Wiring MN796 ACB530 5 4 3 Baldor 2 Wire Operating Mode This operating mode provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 Baldor 2 Wire Figure 5 7 Baldor 2 Wire Operating M
340. ted to 24 externally See the manufacturer s 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable instructions To use sensors 26 RO3A M Default operation supplied by the drive aux voltage 27 IRO3B La Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 output Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed 31 Start stop hand auto DI1 6 Analog output AO2 Current and T AI 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready a 2 gt gt AI2 0 4 20 mA Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable DI4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 E Jo AM 0 10V SEI Al 0 4 20 mA MN796 ACB530 Control Wiring 5 9 5 4 6 PID Control Operating Mode This operating mode provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PROCESS CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Figure 5 10 PID Control Operating Mode Connection Example X1 1 10 kohm 41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 All External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 V E a
341. ter group 32 SUPERVISION 8 28 2 Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 8425 8426 8435 8436 8495 Sequence programming state change 8496 according to supervision functions Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock 8 29 1 Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE PID control There is one built in PID controller in the drive e Process PID PID1 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference MN796 ACB530 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application 8 23 8 30 1 Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example Pressure boost pump PID control block diag
342. ters Selecting an operating mode sets all other parameters to their default values except e Group START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 9802 COMM PROT SEL Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE through Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters After selecting an operating mode you can make additional parameter changes manually with the keypad You enable application operating modes by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC OPERATING MODE By default 1 ABB 2 Wire is the enabled operating mode The following sections describe each of the application operating modes and provide a connection example for each operating mode The last section in this chapter Operating mode default values for parameters lists the parameters that the operating modes change and the default values established by each operating mode The ACB530 has six standard Operating Modes The table below provides a summary of the Operating Modes and describes typical applications 5 4 Control Wiring MN796 ACB530 Suitable applications ABB 2 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times ABB 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used The d
343. the network master and the EFB protocol CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode Contains the status of the EFB protocol Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 Default O Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 MN796 ACB530 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Group Selection Value EFB EFB PAR 18 5318 PROTOCOL Continued EFB PAR 19 5319 EFB PAR 20 5320 LOAD PVL SIGNAL 6401 ANALYZER 100 101 178 PVL FILTER TIME 6402 LOGGERS RESET
344. thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value see parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model see parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT through 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors see Group MOTOR TEMP MEAS The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data 4 9 4 Emergency Stop Devices The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous incoming voltage 4 18 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 4 10 Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power The rated fuse currents given in the tables are the maximums for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the input current Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating
345. til you get there e Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key e Press C to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display means forward and O reverse e Press 9 to stop the motor gt d orwar reverse To change the direction of the motor rotation direction direction e Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from O NO to 1 YES or vice versa LOC UPAR EDIT Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described 9914 PHASE INVERSION above 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 8 1 3 5 FINAL CHECK O After the whole set up is completed check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink THE DRIVE IS NOW READY FOR USE 8 2 Controlling the Drive through the I O Interface This section gives instructions on how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the basic keypad are shown as an example 8 2 1 PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3 REQUEST In remote control the panel Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram display shows text REM given for standard mod
346. time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the crosssectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Table 4 4 Fuses 208 240V Drives ACB530 U1 Input Current Input Power mains Fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 0446 2 oase 68 10 10 JJ8 10 O7A6 2 JJS 60 JJS 80 JJS 100 JJS 110 JJS 150 JJS 200 JJS 250 221A 2 JJS 300 248A 2 JJS 350 ACB530 U1 Input Current Input Power mains Fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 26894 3 08A8 4 124 4 DAS OAT 05A4 4 10 JJS 350 MN796 ACB530 Power Wiring 4 19 Table 4 6 Fuses 500 600V Drives ACB530 U1 Input Current Input Power mains Fuses see below A IEC 60269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 09A0 6 a LL LE s 027A 6 032A 6 Aa 4 11 Check Installation Before applying power perform the following checks Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected see section
347. ting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Group Relay Outputs Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Group Analog Outputs Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion 6 10 Using the Keypad MN796 ACB530 6 2 8 Changed Parameters Mode In the Changed parameters mode you can e view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e Change these parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 6 2 8 1 How to View and Edit Changed Parameters Stee tion SIA n w LOC UMA N MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by SA px ETERS NAAA L NS pressing x r repeatedly until you get to the Main menu l 7 CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the menu with LOC t CHANGED PAR keys a and vy and pressing ENER 120 ONST SPEED 1 WwW 10 0 Hz ON 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLI C MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the changed parameter on the list with keys lt a and v The value of the LOC UPAR EDI T selected parameter is shown below it Press E to modify the value 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Hiz an CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys lt 4 and LOC UPAR EDIT 1202 C
348. tion Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local Baldor representative CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local Baldor representative SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 0 3 MN796 ACB530 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 9 6 Fault Fault name in A D ription and r mmen rrectiv tion ode panel escription and reco ended corrective actio EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application EFB 2 The meaning is protocol dependent EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct e Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output e The fault can be err
349. tivating the digital input resets the drive DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset Source e See DI1 INV above Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists Default O NOT SEL Range 6 to 7 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 above ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is 0301 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 INV above Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the
350. tor rotation or e Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME e Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 Al LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 e Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be OVERTEMP near R1 through R4 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan
351. ts the communication protocol NOTE COMM PROT SEL 9802 can only be modified if the drive is stopped 7 68 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Chapter 8 Start Up Motor Model Calc 8 Customizing Your Application This chapter contains information on how to perform the start up start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface and perform a motor model calculation on the drive The chapter also describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages 8 1 Starting up the drive WARNING The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in Chapter 1 must be followed during the start up procedure WARNING The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode WARNING Failure to correctly start up the motor may cause damage De couple the driven machine if e there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or e amotor model calc needs to be performed during the drive start up Motor model calc is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy The drive start up uses the assisant keypad The Start up assistant which is included in the assistant keypad only guides you through all essential settings to be done In t
352. uctions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Figure 4 1 ohm o 4 5 4 Wiring IP21 UL Type 1 Enclosure with Cables Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the shield can be twisted into a bundle pig tail Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize noise radiation Bom 4 4 Power Wiring MN796 ACB530 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp 5 Route both cables through the clamps 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals See the table on the right for tightening torques Note For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size 7 Connect the bundle pig tail created from the motor cable shield to the GND terminal Tightening Torque Figure 4 2 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s Power motor cables and clamps not shown in the figure
353. ue Parameter Name and Description Default O NONE Range 0 6 THERM 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input e When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated e See the connection figure below Thermistor relay PTC sensor 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 or 6 THERM 1 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board Control board DIG or 24 V DC Z 2 Die J 424V DC T a Y Hd Motor 323 nF Motor e The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24V and a digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature 28 kohm THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated e See the connection figure above Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL Default 1 Al1 Range 1 8 Al PT100 and PTC Al2
354. uency or 90 C with 8kHz Switching frequency See the parameter description for 2607 for details 2 2 Degrees of Protection Available enclosures e P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles e P54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Note UL type 12 enclosure is not available for type ACB530 01 290A 4 Compared to the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP54 UL type 12 enclosure has e the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure a different outer plastic cover an additional internal fan to improve cooling e larger dimensions the same rating does not require a derating MN796 ACB530 General Information and Ratings 2 5 2 6 General Information and Ratings MN796 ACB530 Chapter 3 Installing the Drive 3 1 Mechanical Installation 3 1 1 What This Chapter Contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site inspect the drive and install the drive mechanically 3 1 2 Checking the Installation Site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to the following pages for dimension drawings of drives 3 1 3 Requirements for the Installation
355. ult 0 5102 5106 Range 0 65535 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters FBA PAR REFRESH 5127 Default O DONE Range 0 1 DONE Refreshing done REFRESH Refreshing e After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings NOTE FBA PAR REFRESH 5127 can only be modified if the drive is stopped FILE CPI FW REV 5128 Default READ ONLY Range Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 FILE CONFIG ID 5129 Default READ ONLY Range Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent FILE CONFIG REV 5130 Default READ ONLY Range Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 7 61 Parameter Descriptions MN796 ACB530 Parameter Number Selection Value EXT COMM FBA STATUS 5131 MODULE Continuea Group FBA CPI FW REV 5132 FBA APPL FW REV 5133 PANEL COMM STATION ID 5201 BAUD RATE 5202 PARITY 5203 OK MESSAGES 5204 PARITY ERRORS 5205 7 62 Parameter Descriptions Table 7 1
356. upervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit 8 24 5 Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given 8 24 6 Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for speed current maximum torque maximum and DC voltage 8 25 1 Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see Technical data Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic resets must be activated by the user 8 27 1 Settings Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 8 22 Start Up Motor Model Calc amp Customizing Your Application MN796 ACB530 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 27 2 Diagnostics Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level 8 28 1 Settings Parame
357. upervision mode for the user adjustable load curves d This functionality replaces the former UNE pani underload supervision in Group l d FAULT FUNCTIONS To emulate it pee eye see Correspondence with the obsolete S underload supervision on next page Underload area P3708 P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 mh Output frequency Hz Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure The parameter characteristics were as described below e If the load drops below the set Ty curve for longer than the time 78 A unde oad curve types E set by parameter 3014 80 NS UNDERLOAD TIME obsolete 7 the underload protection is 60 4 activated J e Curves 1 3 reach maximum at 40 the motor rated frequency set by J parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM 20 4 l FREQ TM nominal torque of the motor A UN e fN nominal frequency of the N 24 fy motor If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters Underload supervision ith parameters 3013 3013 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD FUNCTION No underload functionality E E MED EN Underload curve fault generated Underload curve alarm t t generated A MODE FUNC TIME Obs par New parameters L
358. us references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 1 FORWARD Resultant ref DIRECTION i Fieldbus reference 163 1003 2 REVERSE DIRECTION Fieldbus reference Max ref 1003 3 REQUEST DIRECTION Fieldbus 16396 reference Max ref E 11 Fieldbus Adapter As mentioned earlier in this Appendix two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB e fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols e PROFIBUS DP e Ethernet Modbus TCP Ethernet IP EtherCAT PROFINET 10 POWERLINK CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet The ACB530 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module E 11 1 Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of e Output Words CONTROL WORD REFER
359. used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Selecting the source for the process reference If AM is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed frequency limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes 1106 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 1106 1301 1303 3001 1107 1108 2001 2002 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run enable signal 1601 Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through Group 14 RELAY relay output RO1 and if MREL 01 output OUTPUTS relay module is in use RO2 RO4 Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion 8 4 1 4 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up assistant Main displays and information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both
360. ut 1 Al1 The filtered signal reaches 6396 of a step change within the 63 time specified 100 Filtered signal Time constant Default 0 0 Range 0 0 100 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e See MINIMUM Al1 above Default 100 096 Range 0 0 100 096 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0 s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 Al2 e See FILTER Al1 above Default 1 Range 0 36 46 47 52 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires e Run enable signal present e No faults exist e Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on RUN Energize relay when the drive is running FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 e See Group SUPERVISION SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first
361. uts This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE Parameter Descriptions 7 25 Table 7 1 Parameter Definitions Continued Parameter Number Selection Value SYSTEM PASS CODE 1603 CONTROLS Continued Group FAULT RESET SEL 1604 LOCAL LOCK 1606 7 26 Parameter Descriptions Parameter Name and Description Default 0 Range 0 65535 Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock e See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once e This entry reverts back to O automatically Default 0 KEYPAD Range 6 to 8 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source e Fault reset is always possible with control panel DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 above START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fieldbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De ac
362. vating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 INV above Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart Default 10096 Range 15 30096 Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost e See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Default 0 0 s NOT SEL Range 0 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Zero Speed Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The drive modu
363. ve or negative ABB Drives Profile Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 1 FORWARD Resultant ref DIRECTION i Fieldbus reference 163 1003 2 REVERSE DIRECTION Resultant ref gt 100 1003 3 REQUEST Resultant ref DIRECTION Fieldbus Max ref E 17 6 Actual Value Scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section For example Feedback Integer Scaled Value 1 10 0 196 10 e 0 196 196 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows mms Sem ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 ACT2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Virtual addresses of the drive control The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows 1 Control Word 2 Reference 1 REF 1 3 Reference 2 REF2 4 Status Word 5 Actual Value 1 ACT1 6 Actual Value 2 ACT2 E 32 Fieldbus Communications MN796 ACB530 UNITED STATES ARIZONA PHOENIX 4211 S 43RD PLACE PHOENIX AZ 85040 PHONE 602 470 0407 FAX 602 470 0464 ARKANSAS CLARKSVILLE 706 WEST MAIN STREET CLARKSVILLE AR 72830 PHONE 479 754 9108 FAX 479 754 9205 CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES 6480 FLOTILLA STREET COMMERCE CA 90040 PHONE 323 724 6771 FAX 323 721 5859 HAYWARD 21056 FORBES ST
364. ways 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively Signal 1 0102 SPEED for operating modes ABB 3 Wire Baldor 2 Wire Motor Potentiometer Hand Auto and Process control 0103 OUTPUT FREQ for operating mode ABB 2 Wire Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three signals from group OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUTS DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum display values This has no effe
365. with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes eg the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match Restore the full parameter set from the keypad to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the keypad to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1607 5201 nor any group EXT COMM MODULE and EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy user set 1 parameters from the keypad to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 OPERATING MODE see section user Operating Modes and then uploaded to the keypad with UPLOAD TO PANEL Copy user set 2 parameters from the keypad to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Copy user s
366. xceed the maximum motor cable length given in the appropriate table below 4 9 2 1 Motor Cable Length for 460V Drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 460V drives with different switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Table 4 2 Maximum Cable Length for 460V Drives EMC Limits Second Environment Category 03 FirstEnvironment CategoryC2 Basic Unit with du at i1kHz 4kHz 8kHz 1kHz 4kHz 8kHz 1 4kHz 8 12kHz filters m ft m ft m ft m J ft m ft m ft m ft m J ft m ft R1 300 960 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490 R2 300 980 300 eso 300 eso 300 eso 100 330 30 es 200 660 100 330 250 820 Rs 300 eso 800 980 300 eso 300 eso 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820 R4 300 980 300 eso soo eso aoo eso 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980 R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 150 490 300 980 R 100 330 100 330 gt too 330 100 330 gt 300 980 150 4907 300 980 See the new terms in section IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 12 kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Under heading Operational limits the B
367. y from the type designation Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating By type designation the table below provides ratings for the ACB530 adjustable speed AC drive including e IEC ratings e NEMA ratings Shaded columns e frame size Table 2 1 Ratings 208 240V Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols Type Normause Heav dutyuse ACB530 U1 see below Three phase supply voltage 208 240V o2 78 J 35 2 5 L 3A2 wa a 3 ma s 4 Pe 4A we 4 o wo s s Pe o ena 2231 55 75 178 45 60 R6 evo xs 75 3 7 Fe 2 2 General Information and Ratings MN796 ACB530 Table 2 2 Ratings 380 480V Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols Treo Nomalue Heaw duyuse mmm Dr oe le ole see below Three phase supply voltage 380 480V SE 9 3 s 4 22 8 ma X osa 88 4 5 9 3 a area 7 Ne 9 72 Notes so P A4 o Nez 75 77 Nee2 P 5 amp 4 15 Nwe2 100 98 motez 75 P5 A4 3 7 ws we s wo re 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 re 195A 44 205 110 Note 1682 90 Notet Re 246A 4 246 132 200 192 110 150
368. y of manufacture Y Y Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 00001 1 8 Safe Start Up and Operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive 1 8 1 Electrical Safety WARNING It is not recommended to run the permanent magnet synchronous motor over 1 2 times the rated speed Motor overspeed may lead to overvoltage which may permanently damage the drive MN796 ACB530 Introduction 1 3 1 8 2 General Safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the keypad start and stop keys and or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is 5 in 10 minutes Even whe
369. z 0 30000 RPM 1206 Default 30 0 Hz 1800 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM 1207 Default 48 0 Hz 2880 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM 1208 Default 60 0 Hz 3600 RPM Range 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 RPM ANALOG MINIMUM AH 1301 Default 0 096 INPUTS Range 0 0 100 096 MAXIMUM AH 1302 Default 100 096 Range 0 0 100 096 FILTER AI 1303 Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0s MINIMUM AI2 1304 Default 0 096 Range 0 0 100 096 MAXIMUM Al2 1305 Default 100 096 Range 0 0 100 096 FILTER AI2 1306 Default 0 1 s Range 0 0 10 0s RELAY RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 Default 1 OUTPUTS Range 0 36 46 47 52 RELAY OUTPUT 2 1402 Default 2 Range 0 36 46 47 52 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1403 Default 3 Range 0 36 46 47 52 RO 1 ON DELAY 1404 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s RO 1 OFF DELAY 1405 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s RO 2 ON DELAY 1406 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s RO 2 OFF DELAY 1407 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s RO 3 ON DELAY 1408 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s RO 3 OFF DELAY 1409 Default 0 0 s Range 0 0 3600 0 s ANALOG AO1 CONTENT SEL 1501 Default 103 Parameter 0103 OUPUT FREQ OUTPUTS Range 99 178 AO1 CONTENT MIN 1502 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1501 Range AO1 CONTENT MAX 1503 Default Depends on the signal selected with Parameter 1501 Range MINIMUM AO1 1504 Default 0 0mA Range 0 0 20 0m

User`s manual ACB530

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents